USRE48956E1 - Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals - Google Patents
Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- USRE48956E1 USRE48956E1 US15/982,681 US201815982681A USRE48956E US RE48956 E1 USRE48956 E1 US RE48956E1 US 201815982681 A US201815982681 A US 201815982681A US RE48956 E USRE48956 E US RE48956E
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- measurement
- illumination
- photocurrent
- drive current
- measurements
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Active
Links
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 753
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 404
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 117
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 claims description 28
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 claims description 25
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims description 14
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 claims description 10
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 claims description 6
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 97
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 96
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 47
- 230000004907 flux Effects 0.000 description 38
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 24
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 15
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 14
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000001976 improved effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000003595 spectral effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorus Chemical compound [P] OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000032683 aging Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000012935 Averaging Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000003679 aging effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000004438 eyesight Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007935 neutral effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000630 rising effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229920006395 saturated elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 2
- 241001465805 Nymphalidae Species 0.000 description 1
- -1 YAG) Chemical compound 0.000 description 1
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004456 color vision Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001934 delay Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003111 delayed effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002349 favourable effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000383 hazardous chemical Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003116 impacting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012535 impurity Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000691 measurement method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000116 mitigating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005215 recombination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006798 recombination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009877 rendering Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012163 sequencing technique Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002277 temperature effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B45/00—Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
- H05B45/20—Controlling the colour of the light
- H05B45/22—Controlling the colour of the light using optical feedback
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B45/00—Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
- H05B45/20—Controlling the colour of the light
- H05B45/24—Controlling the colour of the light using electrical feedback from LEDs or from LED modules
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B45/00—Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
- H05B45/20—Controlling the colour of the light
- H05B45/28—Controlling the colour of the light using temperature feedback
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B45/00—Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
- H05B45/30—Driver circuits
- H05B45/37—Converter circuits
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B45/00—Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
- H05B45/30—Driver circuits
- H05B45/37—Converter circuits
- H05B45/3725—Switched mode power supply [SMPS]
- H05B45/375—Switched mode power supply [SMPS] using buck topology
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B47/00—Circuit arrangements for operating light sources in general, i.e. where the type of light source is not relevant
- H05B47/10—Controlling the light source
- H05B47/175—Controlling the light source by remote control
- H05B47/19—Controlling the light source by remote control via wireless transmission
Definitions
- This invention relates to illumination devices and, more particularly, to illumination devices comprising a plurality of light emitting diode (LED) elements and to interference-resistant methods for monitoring and adjusting the illumination devices during operation.
- LED light emitting diode
- LEDs light emitting diodes
- LEDs provide a number of advantages over traditional light sources such as incandescent and fluorescent light bulbs, including low power consumption, long lifetime, lack of hazardous materials, and additional specific advantages for different applications.
- LEDs When used for general illumination, LEDs provide the opportunity to adjust the color (e.g., from white, to blue, to green, etc.) or the color temperature (e.g., from “warm white” to “cool white”) to produce different lighting effects.
- LEDs are rapidly replacing the Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamps (CCFL) conventionally used in many display applications (such as LCD backlights), due to the smaller form factor and wider color gamut provided by LEDs.
- Organic LEDs OLEDs
- OLEDs which use arrays of multi-colored organic LEDs to produce light for each display pixel, are also becoming popular for many types of display devices.
- LED devices may combine different colors of LEDs within the same package to produce a multi-colored LED device, or lamp.
- An example of a multi-colored LED device is one in which two or more different colors of LEDs are combined to produce white or near-white light.
- white light lamps there are many different types of white light lamps on the market, some of which combine red, green and blue (RGB) LEDs, red, green, blue and yellow (RGBY) LEDs, white and red (WR) LEDs, RGBW LEDs, etc.
- these lamps may be configured to generate white light or near-white light within a wide gamut of color points or color temperatures ranging from “warm white” (e.g., roughly 2600K-3700K), to “neutral white” (e.g., 3700K-5000K) to “cool white” (e.g., 5000K-8300K).
- warm white e.g., roughly 2600K-3700K
- neutral white e.g., 3700K-5000K
- cool white e.g., 5000K-8300K
- LEDs have many advantages over conventional light sources, a disadvantage of LEDs is that their output characteristics tend to vary over temperature, process and time.
- the luminous flux or the perceived power of light emitted by an LED, is directly proportional to the drive current supplied thereto.
- the luminous flux of an LED is controlled by increasing/decreasing the drive current supplied to the LED to correspondingly increase/decrease the luminous flux.
- the luminous flux generated by an LED for a given drive current does not remain constant over temperature and time, and gradually decreases with increasing temperature and as the LED ages over time.
- the luminous flux tends to vary from batch to batch, and even from one LED to another in the same batch, due to process variations.
- LED manufacturers try to compensate for process variations by sorting or binning the LEDs based on factory measured characteristics, such as chromaticity (or color), luminous flux and forward voltage.
- binning alone cannot compensate for changes in LED output characteristics due to aging and temperature fluctuations during use of the LED device.
- such adjustment may involve compensation measurements of one or more LED elements within a lamp. Interference from a nearby lamp can cause errors in such measurements for a given lamp, potentially resulting in incorrect compensation for the lamp. It would therefore be desirable to develop interference-resistant compensation methods for LED illumination devices, and illumination devices incorporating such methods.
- a method is provided herein for controlling an illumination device comprising multiple emission light emitting diodes (LED) elements.
- LED element refers to either a single LED or a chain of serially connected LEDs supplied with the same drive current.
- emission LED element as used herein is an LED element configured for light emission, as opposed to, for example, an LED configured as a light detector.
- An embodiment of the method includes operating one or more of the multiple emission LED elements at a respective substantially continuous drive current sufficient to produce illumination, bringing to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive current of all except one of the emission LED elements within the illumination device for the duration of a first measurement interval, and bringing to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive current of all except one of the emission LED elements for the duration of a second measurement interval subsequent to the first measurement interval.
- the first measurement interval is one of a first series of measurement intervals interspersed with periods of operating the emission LED elements to produce illumination
- the second measurement interval is one of a second series of measurement intervals interspersed with periods of operating the emission LED elements to produce illumination.
- the first series of measurement intervals and second series of measurement intervals are separated by respective first and second offsets from a timing reference.
- the method further includes discontinuing use of the first series of measurement intervals at a time subsequent to the end of the first measurement interval.
- the method may further include applying a drive current sufficient to produce illumination to one of the emission LED elements during each of the first and second measurement intervals, and monitoring a measurement photocurrent induced in a measurement photodetector within the lamp while the drive current is applied.
- the method also includes determining that a result of monitoring the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of an expected range. In an embodiment, this determining includes comparing the result to a previously stored result. In another embodiment, bringing to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive current of all except one of the emission LED elements for the duration of the second measurement interval is in response to the determination that the result of monitoring the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of the expected range.
- the method also includes, in response to the determination that the result of monitoring the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of the expected range, repeating, during an additional one of the first series of measurement intervals, applying the drive current sufficient to produce illumination to the one of the emission LED elements and said monitoring the measurement photocurrent induced in the measurement photodetector.
- the method may further include determining whether a predetermined number of out-of-range measurements using the first series of measurement intervals has occurred. In such an embodiment, bringing to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive current of all except one of the emission LED elements for the duration of a second measurement interval may be in response to a determination that the predetermined number of out-of-range measurements using the first series of measurement intervals has occurred.
- the method includes, for each of the first and second measurement intervals, bringing the drive current applied to the one of the emission LED elements to a level insufficient to produce illumination for a portion of the measurement interval, such that the respective drive currents of all of the emission LED elements within the illumination device are at a level insufficient to produce illumination for the portion of the measurement interval.
- the method may further include monitoring a background photocurrent induced in the measurement photodetector during the portion of the measurement interval with the drive currents of all of the emission LED elements at a level insufficient to produce illumination, and subtracting the background photocurrent from the measurement photocurrent.
- the result of monitoring a measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval includes a result of subtracting the background photocurrent from the measurement photocurrent for the first measurement interval.
- an illumination device in addition to the method embodiments described above, an illumination device is contemplated herein.
- the device includes multiple emission LED elements, one or more photodetectors, and a control circuit operably coupled to the multiple emission LED elements and the one or more photodetectors.
- the control circuit is adapted to operate one or more of the multiple emission LED elements at a respective substantially continuous drive current to produce illumination, bring to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive current of all except one of the emission LED elements within the illumination device for the duration of a first measurement interval, and bring to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive currents of all except one of the emission LED elements for the duration of a second measurement interval subsequent to the first measurement interval.
- the first measurement interval is one of a first series of measurement intervals interspersed with periods of operating the emission LED elements to produce illumination
- the second measurement interval is one of a second series of measurement intervals interspersed with periods of operating the emission LED elements to produce illumination.
- the first series of measurement intervals and second series of measurement intervals are separated by respective first and second offsets from a timing reference.
- the illumination device also includes a timing reference generator operatively coupled to the control circuit and adapted to generate a periodic timing reference.
- the control circuit may be further adapted to generate the first series of measurement intervals synchronized to the timing reference with a first offset from the timing reference and generate the second series of measurement intervals synchronized to the timing reference with a second offset from the timing reference.
- the control circuit is adapted to discontinue use of the first series of measurement intervals at a time subsequent to the end of the first measurement interval.
- the illumination device also includes an LED driver and receiver circuit operably coupled to the multiple emission LED elements, the one or more photodetectors, and the control circuit.
- the control circuit is adapted to use the LED driver and receiver circuit to adjust the respective drive currents of the emission LED elements.
- the control circuit is adapted to use the LED driver and receiver circuit to, during each of said first measurement interval and said second measurement interval, bring to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive currents of all except one of the emission LED elements, apply a drive current sufficient to produce illumination to the one of the emission LED elements, and monitor a measurement photocurrent induced in the measurement photodetector while the drive current is applied.
- control circuit is further adapted to determine whether a result of monitoring the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of an expected range.
- the control circuit may also be adapted to bring to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive currents of all except one of the emission LED elements for the duration of the second measurement interval in response to a determination that the result is outside of the expected range.
- the illumination device also includes a storage medium operably coupled to the control circuit, and the control circuit is adapted to compare the result of monitoring the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval with a result previously stored in the storage medium.
- control circuit is further adapted to determine whether a predetermined number of out-of-range measurements using the first series of measurement intervals has occurred.
- the control circuit is further adapted to, for each of the first and second measurement intervals, bring the drive current applied to the one of the emission LED elements to a level insufficient to produce illumination for a portion of the measurement interval, such that the respective drive currents of all of the emission LED elements within the illumination device are at a level insufficient to produce illumination for the portion of the measurement interval.
- the control circuit may further be adapted to monitor a background photocurrent induced in the measurement photodetector during the portion of the measurement interval and subtract the background photocurrent from the measurement photocurrent.
- the control circuit is further adapted to determine whether a result of subtracting the background photocurrent from the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of an expected range.
- FIG. 1 is a graph of the 1931 CIE chromaticity diagram illustrating the gamut of human color perception and the gamut achievable by an illumination device comprising a plurality of multiple color LEDs (e.g., red, green and blue);
- a plurality of multiple color LEDs e.g., red, green and blue
- FIG. 2 is a graph illustrating the non-linear relationship between relative luminous flux and junction temperature for white, blue and green LEDs
- FIG. 3 is a graph illustrating the substantially more non-linear relationship between relative luminous flux and junction temperature for red, red-orange and yellow (amber) LEDs;
- FIG. 4 is a graph illustrating the non-linear relationship between relative luminous flux and drive current for red and red-orange LEDs
- FIG. 5 is a graph illustrating the substantially more non-linear relationship between relative luminous flux and drive current for white, blue and green LEDs
- FIG. 6 is an exemplary timing diagram for an illumination device comprising four emission LEDs, illustrating intervals during which emitter forward voltage measurements are obtained from each emission LED, one LED at a time;
- FIG. 7 is a graphical representation depicting how one or more interpolation technique(s) may be used in a compensation method to determine the drive current needed to produce a desired luminous flux for a given LED using previously-obtained calibration values stored within the illumination device;
- FIG. 8 is an exemplary timing diagram for an illumination device comprising four emission LEDs and one or more photodetectors, illustrating intervals during which measurements are taken of photocurrent, detector forward voltage and emitter forward voltage;
- FIG. 9 is a graphical representation depicting how one or more interpolation technique(s) may be used in a compensation method to determine the expected photocurrent value for a given LED using the present forward voltage, the present drive current and previously-obtained calibration values stored within the illumination device;
- FIG. 10 is an exemplary timing diagram illustrating an embodiment for which the measurement intervals of FIG. 6 or FIG. 8 are within compensation periods occurring relatively infrequently, and for which illumination drive currents are increased during a compensation period to avoid flicker;
- FIG. 11A is a graph illustrating subtraction of ambient light detected when the measured LED element is turned off
- FIG. 11B is a graph illustrating error that can result from ambient subtraction when a nearby lamp is performing compensation measurements
- FIG. 12 is an exemplary timing diagram illustrating overlap of compensation measurements by neighboring lamps
- FIG. 13A is an exemplary timing diagram illustrating a series of detection intervals followed by a series of measurement intervals
- FIG. 13B is a timing diagram illustrating a series of detection intervals interspersed with intervals for taking non-sensitive measurements, followed by a series of intervals for taking sensitive measurements;
- FIG. 14 is an exemplary timing diagram illustrating overlapping but non-interfering measurement sequences by neighboring lamps
- FIG. 15 is an exemplary timing diagram illustrating a timing reference synchronized to the AC mains, and first and second sets of measurement intervals separated from the timing reference by first and second offset times;
- FIG. 16A is a flow chart illustrating an exemplary method disclosed for controlling a lamp to perform compensation measurements
- FIG. 16B is a flow chart illustrating an exemplary method for controlling a lamp to initiate compensation measurements
- FIG. 16C is a flow chart illustrating another exemplary method for controlling a lamp to initiate compensation measurements
- FIG. 17 is a chart illustrating exemplary configuration information that may be stored within an illumination device and used in embodiments of methods described herein;
- FIG. 18A is a photograph of an exemplary multi-lamp illumination device
- FIG. 18B is a computer generated image showing a top view of an exemplary emitter module, or lamp, that may be included within the exemplary illumination device of FIG. 18A ;
- FIG. 19A is a photograph of an exemplary illumination device
- FIG. 19B is a computer generated image showing a top view of an exemplary emitter module, or lamp, that may be included within the exemplary illumination device of FIG. 19A ;
- FIG. 20 is an exemplary block diagram of circuit components that may be included within an embodiment of an illumination device disclosed herein;
- FIG. 21 is an exemplary block diagram of an embodiment of an LED driver and receiver circuit that may be included within the illumination device of FIG. 20 ;
- FIG. 22 is an exemplary block diagram of circuit components that may be included within an embodiment of a multi-lamp illumination device disclosed herein;
- FIG. 23 is an exemplary block diagram of an embodiment of interface and emitter circuitry that may be included within the illumination device of FIG. 22 .
- An LED generally comprises a chip of semiconducting material doped with impurities to create a p-n junction.
- current flows easily from the p-side, or anode, to the n-side, or cathode, but not in the reverse direction.
- Charge-carriers electrons and holes—flow into the junction from electrodes with different voltages.
- the wavelength of the light emitted by the LED depends on the band gap energy of the materials forming the p-n junction of the LED.
- Red and yellow LEDs are commonly composed of materials (e.g., AlInGaP) having a relatively low band gap energy, and thus produce longer wavelengths of light. For example, most red and yellow LEDs have a peak wavelength in the range of approximately 610-650 nm and approximately 580-600 nm, respectively.
- green and blue LEDs are commonly composed of materials (e.g., GaN or InGaN) having a larger band gap energy, and thus, produce shorter wavelengths of light. For example, most green and blue LEDs have a peak wavelength in the range of approximately 515-550 nm and approximately 450-490 nm, respectively.
- a “white” LED may be formed by covering or coating, e.g., a violet or blue LED having a peak emission wavelength of about 400-490 nm with a phosphor (e.g., YAG), which down-converts the photons emitted by the blue LED to a lower energy level, or a longer peak emission wavelength, such as about 525 nm to about 600 nm.
- a phosphor e.g., YAG
- YAG a phosphor
- such an LED may be configured to produce substantially white light having a correlated color temperature (CCT) of about 3000K.
- CCT correlated color temperature
- a skilled artisan would understand how different colors of LEDs and/or different phosphors may be used to produce a “white” LED with a potentially different CCT.
- differently colored LEDs may be combined to produce white or near-white light within a wide gamut of color points or CCTs ranging from “warm white” (e.g., roughly 2600K-3000K), to “neutral white” (e.g., 3000K-4000K) to “cool white” (e.g., 4000K-8300K).
- white light illumination devices include, but are not limited to, those that combine red, green and blue (RGB) LEDs, red, green, blue and yellow (RGBY) LEDs, white and red (WR) LEDs, and RGBW LEDs.
- the illumination devices disclosed herein may in certain embodiments include one or more emitter modules, which may also be called lamps.
- An emitter module has a plurality of LED elements and one or more photodetectors combined into a package.
- an LED element may be either a single LED or a chain of serially connected LEDs supplied with the same drive current.
- An LED element configured for its junction(s) to have sufficient forward bias for light emission may be referred to herein as an “emission LED element.”
- An LED may also be configured as a photodetector, typically by applying zero bias or reverse bias to the LED junction and collecting photocurrent induced by incident light.
- multiple LEDs configured as photodetectors may be connected in parallel so that their photocurrents can be combined.
- the present invention is particularly well suited to multi-colored illumination devices in which two or more different colors of LEDs are combined to produce blended white or near-white light, since the output characteristics of differently colored LEDs vary differently over drive current, temperature and time.
- the present invention is also particularly well suited to illumination devices (i.e., tunable illumination devices) that enable the target dimming level and/or the target chromaticity setting to be changed by adjusting the drive currents supplied to one or more of the LEDs, since changes in drive current inherently affect the lumen output, color and temperature of the illumination device.
- These tunable illumination devices should all produce the same color and color rendering index (CRI) when set to a particular dimming level and chromaticity setting (or color set point) on a standardized chromaticity diagram.
- a chromaticity diagram maps the gamut of colors the human eye can perceive in terms of chromaticity coordinates and spectral wavelengths.
- An example of a chromaticity diagram is shown in FIG. 1 .
- the spectral wavelengths of all saturated colors are distributed around the edge of an outlined space (called the “gamut” of human vision), which encompasses all of the hues perceived by the human eye.
- the curved edge of the gamut is called the spectral locus and corresponds to monochromatic light, with each point representing a pure hue of a single wavelength.
- the straight edge on the lower part of the gamut is called the line of purples. These colors, although they are on the border of the gamut, have no counterpart in monochromatic light. Less saturated colors appear in the interior of the figure, with white and near-white colors near the center.
- CIE Commission Internationale de l' ⁇ clairage
- colors within the gamut of human vision are mapped in terms of chromaticity coordinates (x, y).
- the diagram of FIG. 1 is only one illustrative example of how perceived colors may be represented using a two-dimensional space, and other “color spaces,” with corresponding chromaticity values, may also be used.
- Some exemplary color spaces include the CIE 1931 XYZ color space, the CIE 1931 RGB color space, the CIE 1976 LUV color space, and various other RGB color spaces (e.g., sRGB, Adobe RGB, etc.).
- Wavelength in nanometers (nm) of the corresponding monochromatic light is indicated along the curved edge of the gamut in FIG. 1 .
- the dominant wavelength, as perceived by the eye, of a point within the gamut may be found using a line including the point and a reference point for the illumination source, such as point C of FIG. 1 corresponding to the CIE-C reference.
- the dominant wavelength under the reference illumination is read at the intersection of the line with the curved edge of the gamut.
- a red (R) LED with a dominant wavelength of about 640 nm may have a chromaticity coordinate of (0.68, 0.28)
- a green (G) LED with a dominant wavelength of about 525 nm may have a chromaticity coordinate of (0.17, 0.72)
- a blue (B) LED with a dominant wavelength of 465 nm may have a chromaticity coordinate of (0.16, 0.11).
- This dominant wavelength perceived by the eye does not necessarily correspond to the peak wavelength, or wavelength of highest intensity, emitted from an LED.
- the color of an incandescent black body as a function of temperature in Kelvin is also plotted on the diagram of FIG. 1 , in a curve known as the blackbody locus.
- the chromaticity coordinates i.e., color points
- Color points that lie on or near the blackbody locus provide a range of white or near-white light with color temperatures ranging between approximately 2500K and 10,000K.
- These color points are typically achieved by mixing light from two or more differently colored LEDs. For example, light emitted from the RGB LEDs plotted in FIG. 1 may be mixed to produce a substantially white light with a color temperature in the range of about 2500K to about 5000K.
- an illumination device is typically configured to produce a range of white or near-white color temperatures arranged along the blackbody curve (e.g., about 2500K to 5000K)
- some illumination devices may be configured to produce any color within the color gamut, such as triangular color gamut 18 of FIG. 1 , formed by the individual LEDs (e.g., RGB).
- the chromaticity coordinates of the combined light e.g., (0.437, 0.404) for 3000K white light, define the target chromaticity or color set point at which the device is intended to operate.
- the target chromaticity or color set point may be changed by altering the ratio of drive currents supplied to the individual LEDs.
- the target chromaticity of the illumination device may be changed by adjusting the drive current levels (in current dimming) or duty cycle (in PWM dimming) supplied to one or more of the emission LEDs.
- an illumination device comprising RGB LEDs may be configured to produce “warmer” white light by increasing the drive current supplied to the red LEDs and decreasing the drive currents supplied to the blue and/or green LEDs. Since adjusting the drive currents also affects the lumen output and temperature of the illumination device, the target chromaticity must be carefully calibrated and controlled to ensure that the actual chromaticity equals the target value.
- FIGS. 2-3 illustrate how the relative luminous flux of an individual LED changes over junction temperature for different colors of LEDs.
- the luminous flux output from all LEDs generally decreases with increasing temperature.
- the relationship between luminous flux and junction temperature is relatively linear (see FIG. 2 ), while for other colors (e.g., red, orange and especially yellow) the relationship is significantly non-linear (see, FIG. 3 ).
- the chromaticity of an LED also changes with temperature, due to shifts in the dominant wavelength (for both phosphor converted and non-phosphor converted LEDs) and changes in the phosphor efficiency (for phosphor converted LEDs).
- the peak emission wavelength of green LEDs tends to decrease with increasing temperature, while the peak emission wavelength of red and blue LEDs tends to increase with increasing temperature. While the change in chromaticity is relatively linear with temperature for most colors, red and yellow LEDs tend to exhibit a more significant non-linear change.
- FIGS. 4 and 5 illustrate the relationship between luminous flux and drive current for different colors of LEDs (e.g., red, red-orange, white, blue and green LEDs).
- the luminous flux increases with larger drive currents, and decreases with smaller drive currents.
- the change in luminous flux with drive current is non-linear for all colors of LEDs, and this non-linear relationship is substantially more pronounced for certain colors of LEDs (e.g., blue and green LEDs) than others.
- the chromaticity of the illumination also changes when drive currents are increased to combat temperature and/or aging effects, since larger drive currents inherently result in higher LED junction temperatures (see, FIGS. 2-3 ). While the change in chromaticity with drive current/temperature is relatively linear for all colors of LEDs, the rate of change is different for different LED colors and even from part to part.
- U.S. application Ser. Nos. 13/970,990 and 14/314,530 co-pending with the present application and commonly owned and/or subject to assignment with the present application, describe methods of compensation for variation in quantities including temperature and drive current, and illumination devices employing such methods.
- Approaches described in these applications to compensating for variations in luminous flux from LEDs, such as the effects illustrated by FIGS. 2-5 include the use of calibration tables created for the LEDs within an illumination device. Such calibration tables store results of calibration measurements previously made using the LEDs.
- a calibration table stores values of photocurrent induced on a photodetector within the illumination device when a drive current is applied to each LED within the device separately.
- Such a calibration table may in some embodiments store photocurrent values obtained when applying multiple different drive current levels to an LED. In some embodiments in which photocurrent values are obtained when applying different drive current levels, forward voltage measurements are obtained for each LED after each drive current is applied. Such forward voltage measurements can be used as an indication of junction temperature in the LED.
- the calibration table may in further embodiments store photocurrent values obtained at different values of ambient temperature.
- Other types of data and variations of the above-described data may also be included in a calibration table, as described in more detail in co-pending application Ser. Nos. 13/970,990 and 14/314,530.
- the data stored in a calibration table is in some embodiments used for comparison to measurements made during operation of the illumination device. Such comparison can be used to indicate whether properties of one or more of the LEDs within the device have changed, and whether the corresponding drive current of the LED should be adjusted.
- FIG. 6 is an exemplary timing diagram illustrating substantially continuous operation of one or more of the LED elements to produce illumination.
- substantially continuously means that an operative drive current (denoted generically as I 1 in FIG. 6 ) is supplied to the emission LED elements almost continuously, with the exception of intervals in which all of the emission LED elements are momentarily turned “off” for short durations of time 610 .
- drive current I 1 represents a combination of different drive currents applied as appropriate to respective different LED elements within the illumination device, to produce the desired illumination.
- the intervals are utilized for obtaining forward voltage measurements from each of four emission LED elements (Vfe), one LED element at a time, by supplying a relatively small drive current to each LED and measuring the forward voltage developed thereacross. The intervals may also be used for other types of measurements, as shown in FIGS. 8-9 and discussed in more detail below. In certain embodiments discussed further below, all LED elements within the illumination device remain off throughout some of the intervals to allow detection to determine whether measurements are being conducted by a different illumination device.
- the illumination device includes at least four emission LED elements.
- the device includes exactly four emission LED elements, and the forward voltage across each element is measured, one at a time during successive respective measurement intervals. Unless specified otherwise, a measurement performed “during” an interval as used herein is performed within the interval, but not necessarily for the entirety of the interval.
- the four emission LED elements may be of different colors to form a multi-color lamp.
- the multicolor lamp may be configured to produce white light, as described above.
- one or more of the LED elements are driven with respective DC drive currents to produce illumination. In an embodiment, all of the LED elements in the lamp are driven during illumination periods 620 .
- intervals 610 are part of a periodic series having a specific offset (which may be zero) from a periodic timing reference.
- the plot in FIG. 7 of luminous flux vs. LED drive current illustrates an exemplary technique of using calibration values to determine the drive current (Ix) needed to achieve a desired luminous flux (Lx) from an emission LED element at its present operating temperature (reflected in the present value of Vfe, Vfe_present, for the LED element measured during one of intervals 610 of FIG. 6 ).
- Data points 710 denoted by filled circles, represent luminous flux values from a calibration table, obtained during calibration of the LED element using three different drive currents (10%, 30% and 100% of the maximum drive current, in the embodiment of FIG. 7 ) and two different ambient temperatures T 0 and T 1 .
- Each of data points 710 may be associated with a respective forward voltage value Vfe in the calibration table, obtained just before or just after the respective luminous flux measurement at the respective drive current and ambient temperature value. Comparison of these forward voltages in the calibration table for a given LED element to a forward voltage measured during operation can allow the present temperature T_present to be estimated.
- interpolation between the calibration values 710 is used to predict luminous flux values 720 , denoted by unfilled triangles, corresponding to the calibration drive currents at the current operating temperature (T_present).
- an interpolation or curve-fitting using predicted values 720 is used to generate a relationship, plotted as curve 730 , for luminous flux vs. drive current at the present operating temperature.
- the drive current Ix needed to produce the desired luminous flux Lx can then be obtained from the generated relationship.
- the specific interpolation techniques used may depend on the characteristics of the LED element being compensated, along with considerations such as memory and processing capability.
- the approach illustrated in FIGS. 6 and 7 is employed in embodiments of methods for maintaining a target luminous flux from an LED element in spite of changes in the LED element's temperature.
- FIGS. 8 and 9 Another example of a compensation method is illustrated by FIGS. 8 and 9 .
- the timing diagram of FIG. 8 is similar to that of FIG. 6 , with operative drive current I 1 supplied to one or more of the emission LED elements within an illumination device almost continuously, with the exception of intervals during which all of the emission LED elements, except for the emission LED under test, are momentarily turned off for short durations of time 810 .
- the first four of intervals 810 are used for measuring a photocurrent (Iph) induced on a photodetector within the illumination device, in response to illumination that is produced by each emission LED element, one LED element at a time.
- the emission LED under test is driven with an operative drive current level.
- photocurrent measurements allow detection of changes in the luminous flux produced by an LED element at a given drive current, as may occur in LEDs over time.
- the plot in FIG. 9 of photocurrent induced on a detector as a function of LED drive current illustrates an exemplary technique of using calibration values to determine the expected photocurrent (Iph_exp) induced by a particular drive current (Ix) applied to an emission LED element at the present detector temperature (reflected in the present value of the forward voltage measured across the detector, Vfd_present, during one of intervals 810 of FIG. 8 ).
- Data points 910 denoted by filled circles, represent photocurrent values from a calibration table, obtained during calibration of an LED element using three different drive currents (10%, 30% and 100% of the maximum drive current, in the embodiment of FIG. 9 ) and two different ambient temperatures (corresponding to Vfd 0 and Vfd 1 measured at ambient temperatures T 0 and T 1 ).
- interpolation between the calibration values is used to predict expected photocurrent values 920 , denoted by unfilled triangles, corresponding to the calibration drive currents at the current detector temperature (Vfd_present).
- an interpolation or curve-fitting using predicted values 920 is used to generate a relationship, plotted as curve 930 , for expected photocurrent vs. drive current at the present detector temperature.
- the expected photocurrent induced on the detector by an LED operated at the present value of drive current (for example, a drive current obtained using the method illustrated in FIGS. 6 and 7 ) can then be obtained from the generated relationship. This expected value can then be compared to the corresponding presently measured photocurrent obtained during one of intervals 810 shown in FIG. 8 .
- a difference between the measured and expected values indicates a change in the light intensity generated by the LED element over time.
- Such an “aging” effect may be compensated for by adjusting the drive current applied to the LED element, as described in co-pending application Ser. No. 14/314,530.
- FIGS. 6-9 illustrate two examples of compensation methods.
- other compensation methods may be used instead of or in combination with these methods.
- variations in additional quantities such as x and y chromaticity values, can be compensated for.
- adjustment to compensate for one quantity may cause a variation in another, such that compensation methods are iterated until stable desired settings are achieved.
- Other embodiments of compensation methods may also include taking additional or different measurements than those indicated in FIGS. 6 and 8 .
- photocurrent measurements may include measurements using each of multiple photodetectors, where each photodetector is configured for sensitivity to a different spectral range.
- a series of intervals such as intervals 610 of FIG. 6 may extend for the entire time that an illumination device is operating.
- a sequence of compensation measurements may be repeated continuously, one measurement per interval, while the illumination device is operating.
- compensation using intervals such as intervals 610 of FIG. 6 is performed only at certain times during operation of an illumination device. For example, compensation may be performed when a significant change in ambient temperature has been detected, or when there has been a change in settings for the illumination device. Timing diagrams illustrating performance of compensation at selected times are shown in FIG. 10 .
- the upper diagram of FIG. 10 illustrates periods 1010 of continuous illumination produced by application of an operative drive current designated I 1 to one or more LED elements.
- drive current I 1 represents a combination of different drive currents applied to respective different LED elements within the illumination device, to produce the desired illumination.
- illumination periods 1010 are occasionally interrupted by compensation periods 1020 , during which measurements are taken as part of a compensation method.
- initiation of a compensation period 1020 is in response to a determination that there has been a change in some quantity such as ambient temperature or illumination settings for the device.
- compensation periods may be repeated until a changing quantity has stabilized.
- compensation periods 1020 may be initiated at previously specified times or for a fixed number of times, including one time.
- the lower diagram of FIG. 10 is an expanded timing diagram of an exemplary compensation period 1020 .
- Intervals 1022 are similar to intervals 610 of FIG. 6 or intervals 810 of FIG. 8 . Within intervals 1022 , all emission LED elements are turned off except for a single LED element that may be turned on as part of a particular measurement. Between intervals 1022 , one or more of the LED elements within the lamp are supplied with an operative drive current during illumination periods 1024 . In the embodiment of FIG. 10 , the drive current applied during illumination periods 1024 is “boosted” to an increased level designated generically as I 2 .
- drive current level I 2 represents a combination of different drive currents applied to respective different LED elements, each at a higher level than is applied to the LED element in connection with drive current level I 1 during illumination periods 1010 .
- use of a boosted drive current during compensation periods may counteract a “flicker” effect that can result from the interruptions in illumination occurring during a compensation period such as period 1020 .
- compensation methods for an LED illumination device such as an emitter module rely upon measurements of photocurrent induced in a photodetector when a drive current is applied to an LED element.
- subtraction of ambient-induced photocurrent is employed to mitigate the effects of interference. An embodiment for which interference-related illumination can be effectively subtracted is illustrated in FIG. 11A .
- FIG. 11A plots luminous flux vs. time during an interval 1102 similar to, for example, interval 1022 of FIG. 10 .
- a first portion 1104 of the interval is a measurement portion of the interval during which a particular emission LED element may be turned on (while all other emission LED elements in the illumination device are turned off).
- Second portion 1106 in this embodiment is a portion of the interval used for ambient detection, during which all emission LED elements within the illumination device are turned off.
- portions 1104 and 1106 each have a duration of approximately one-half of interval 1102 , the portions could have different relative durations in other embodiments.
- Waveform 1110 represents the luminous flux resulting from turning on an LED element during interval portion 1104 for a measurement, then turning the LED element off during interval portion 1106 .
- Waveform 1112 denoted with a dashed line, represents the luminous flux resulting from ambient light that is constant in intensity for at least the duration of interval 1102 .
- the lower diagram of FIG. 11A plots photocurrent induced in a photodetector in response to the luminous flux plotted in the upper diagram.
- the photodetector has equal sensitivity to the LED illumination represented by waveform 1110 and the ambient illumination represented by waveform 1112 .
- Waveform 1114 denoted with a solid line, represents the total photocurrent induced by the LED and ambient illumination, or the sum of the photocurrent induced by each type of illumination.
- Waveform 1116 denoted by a dashed line, represents the difference between the total photocurrent at any time and an ambient current value I A , where I A is the total current measured at a point during portion 1106 of interval 1102 .
- I A corresponds to the total photocurrent at time T A .
- I A can be obtained by averaging multiple measurements taken during interval portion 1106 , or by using other signal processing techniques known to one of ordinary skill in the art in view of this disclosure.
- total photocurrent I T is obtained by one or more measurements of photocurrent in the detector during interval portion 1104 , accompanied by averaging and/or other signal processing as understood by one of ordinary skill in the art in view of this disclosure. Subtraction of ambient photocurrent I A from total photocurrent I T results in corrected photocurrent I C attributable to the LED illumination corresponding to waveform 1110 .
- the detector used to measure induced ambient photocurrent I A is the same detector used to measure total photocurrent I T during interval portion 1104 when the target LED element is driven at an operative current level. In this way, the ambient photocurrent induced during measurement of the tested LED element may be most accurately accounted for by the ambient photocurrent detected during interval portion 1106 when the tested LED element is off.
- a separate detector may be used for ambient light detection, alternatively or in addition to a detector used for ambient detection during photocurrent measurements. A separate detector for ambient light measurement may be particularly useful, for example, in embodiments for which target settings of the illumination device are adjusted depending on ambient light conditions.
- FIG. 9 illustrates determination of an expected photocurrent value by interpolation from stored calibration values.
- the expected value is compared to the photocurrent measured for the corresponding LED element—for example, Iph 1 of FIG. 8 . If the measured photocurrent includes photocurrent induced by illumination other than that from the LED element, such as total current I T of FIG. 11A , comparison to the expected photocurrent determined as shown in FIG. 9 will provide an inaccurate indication of how illumination from the LED element has changed. The resulting scaling and adjustment of drive current to the LED element may therefore move the LED element away from its target settings rather than helping to maintain them. Comparison of the expected photocurrent to corrected photocurrent I C in the embodiment of FIG. 11A , however, should provide an accurate indication of how the illumination from the LED element may have changed.
- FIG. 11B A situation in which the subtraction technique illustrated in FIG. 11A is not effective in mitigating interference is illustrated by FIG. 11B .
- the upper diagram of FIG. 11B is a plot of luminous flux during the same interval 1102 having first and second portions 1104 and 1106 , respectively, as that shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11A .
- the upper diagram also includes waveform 1110 as also shown in FIG. 11A , representing luminous flux from an LED element turned on during interval portion 1104 .
- the upper diagram of FIG. 11B includes waveform 1120 representing an additional illumination source that is on during interval portion 1104 and off during interval portion 1106 .
- waveform 1120 represents illumination from an additional LED element within a separate illumination device or emitter module than that of the LED element represented by waveform 1110 .
- FIG. 11B plots photocurrent induced in a photodetector in response to the luminous flux plotted in the upper diagram, assuming equal sensitivity of the photodetector to the LED illumination represented by waveforms 1110 and 1120 .
- waveform 1122 in FIG. 11B represents the total photocurrent induced by the illumination sources corresponding to waveforms 110 and 1120 .
- the difference between the total photocurrent and current I A measured at a point during portion 1106 of interval 1102 is also represented by waveform 1122 , because I A is zero in FIG. 11B .
- I T and I C defined in the same manner as for FIG.
- I C is equal to I T in the embodiment of FIG. 11B because I A is zero. Therefore, I C in FIG. 11B does not represent the photocurrent induced solely by illumination from the LED element corresponding to waveform 1110 .
- Use of the photocurrent from FIG. 11B in a compensation method such as that illustrated in FIGS. 8 and 9 would lead to serious errors since a photocurrent not corresponding to a given LED element would be used for determining the adjustment to the drive current of that LED element.
- FIG. 11B an extreme case is illustrated of an interfering light source that is turned on and off at exactly the same times as the LED element being compensated. It is noted that any interference source not having constant intensity over interval 1102 can produce an error in measured photocurrent, even if the interference source does not turn on and off at exactly the same times as the target LED element. If the “ambient” photocurrent measured during interval portion 1106 is not equal to the interference-generated portion of the photocurrent measured during interval portion 1104 , ambient subtraction will not be effective in extracting the photocurrent corresponding to the LED element being compensated.
- An embodiment including a non-constant interference source as shown in FIG. 11B may of course include constant ambient illumination as well, in the manner shown in FIG. 11A . In such an embodiment, the photocurrent associated with the constant illumination could be subtracted out, while the non-constant interfering illumination would lead to compensation errors.
- Non-constant illumination refers to illumination having a substantial variation with time during a measurement interval, or during a portion of a measurement interval in which detection of background or ambient illumination is being performed.
- a substantial variation is a variation that would result in a significant error for a photocurrent measurement conducted during the same interval.
- the size of the variation that would result in a significant error depends on the relative magnitudes of photocurrents induced by a measured LED element and by the external illumination in the photodetector used for the photocurrent measurement.
- FIG. 12 A further illustration of how the kind of interference shown in FIG. 11B can arise is given by FIG. 12 .
- Two timing diagrams are shown in FIG. 12 .
- the upper diagram, designated Lamp A is associated with a first emitter module including multiple LED elements and a photodetector.
- the lower diagram, designated Lamp B corresponds to a second emitter module.
- the two lamps may in some embodiments be part of a single larger illumination device. In other embodiments, the two lamps may be in separate illumination devices that are installed in proximity to one another, or even facing one another.
- Each timing diagram corresponds to a portion of a compensation period such as period 1020 of FIG.
- periods of illumination 1202 are interrupted by intervals including intervals 1210 , 1220 , 1230 and 1240 , during which the emission LED elements within the lamp are turned off and a measurement associated with a particular LED element and/or detector may be taken.
- drive currents applied to LED elements during the illumination periods may be “boosted” as shown in FIG. 10 , to a higher level as compared to the level during longer illumination periods not interrupted by measurements, such as periods 1010 of FIG. 10 .
- interval 1210 of FIG. 12 a forward voltage measurement (denoted as V f1A ) is taken of an emission LED element 1 within Lamp A. No measurements are taken for Lamp B during interval 1210 ; instead, drive currents are applied to one or more of the emission LED elements of Lamp B to produce the desired illumination. In other words, interval 1210 is an interval for Lamp A but not for Lamp B. Whether illumination from Lamp B interferes with the forward voltage measurement taken for Lamp A depends on the relative magnitudes of the bias-induced current in the LED element being measured and the photocurrent induced in the LED element by the external illumination.
- the magnitude of the photocurrent induced may depend on multiple factors, such as the relative locations of Lamp B and Lamp A, the relative wavelengths of the driven LED element in Lamp B and Lamp A, and the carrier recombination lifetimes under measurement conditions for the measured LED element in Lamp A.
- the induced photocurrent from external radiation is on the order of a microampere or less, while the forward bias induced current in the measured element is on the order of a milliampere.
- illumination by Lamp B in interval 1210 of FIG. 12 would not have a significant effect on the forward voltage measurement taken by Lamp A.
- the forward voltage measurement in such an embodiment may be considered to not be sensitive to illumination from the other illumination device.
- the magnitude of the externally-induced photocurrent may be significant by comparison to the measured current.
- the constant illumination provided by the illumination from Lamp B during interval 1210 could be successfully subtracted out if a photocurrent measurement were taken by Lamp A during that interval. This subtraction would correspond to the situation illustrated in FIG. 11A above.
- one of the lamps is performing a photocurrent measurement on an LED element, while the other lamp is performing a forward voltage measurement.
- a forward voltage measurement V f2A of emission LED element 2 of Lamp A is performed, while a photocurrent measurement I ph2B measures the photocurrent induced in a detector of Lamp B by operation of emission LED element 2 of Lamp B.
- forward voltage measurements of emission LED elements are taken using non-operative levels of drive current, meaning drive current levels insufficient to produce significant illumination from the LED. In such an embodiment, the forward voltage measurement taken using one lamp would not be expected to interfere with the photocurrent measurement taken using the other lamp.
- detection is performed during one or more intervals before a photocurrent measurement is performed during one of the intervals.
- the detection during one or more intervals is performed before any measurement associated with compensation of an illumination device is performed.
- Photocurrent measurements, or in some embodiments any measurements, are initiated after detection has been performed for enough intervals to indicate that interference from compensation measurements of another lamp is unlikely.
- a photodetector is used to determine whether outside illumination is present that is not constant throughout the measurement interval.
- the number of intervals used for detection depends on the particular sequences of measurements used by the illumination device performing the method and by any potentially interfering devices. As noted above in the discussion of FIG. 12 , some types of measurement used for compensation of LED elements in an illumination device are more likely to interfere with other illumination devices than other types of measurement.
- the specific measurements most likely to cause interference include measurements of photocurrent induced in a detector by an illuminated LED element. In such an embodiment, those are the measurements most likely to produce a non-constant illumination that could interfere with a photocurrent measurement by a different illumination device.
- the measurements that are most likely to result in interference are also the measurements most likely to be detected by a different illumination device employing detection intervals before starting its own photocurrent measurements. The number of intervals used for detection may depend on how many total measurements are expected to be performed in a compensation measurement sequence, as well as how many of those measurements are expected to be of the kind most likely to cause interference.
- an emitter module including 4 LED elements and at least one photodetector.
- the photodetector(s) may be dedicated photodetectors or may in some embodiments be emission LEDs configured at certain times as photodetectors.
- such an emitter module may use a sequence of 12 measurements for compensation.
- 4 of the compensation measurements could be forward voltage measurements for each of the 4 LED elements.
- Another 4 measurements could be photocurrent measurements for each of the 4 LED elements using one dedicated photodetector.
- Another 2 measurements could be photocurrent measurements for two of the LED elements using an additional photodetector.
- the remaining 2 measurements could be forward voltages across each of two detectors.
- 6 of the 12 compensation measurements are photocurrent measurements.
- any interfering illumination devices will also be configured to use a sequence of 12 compensation measurements, 6 of which are photocurrent measurements. If the particular sequence of measurements that an interfering device may be configured to use is not known, one approach would be to detect for 12 measurement intervals before starting compensation measurements. If no non-constant illumination is detected during any of the 12 intervals, it is likely that no nearby illumination device is performing compensation measurements. In another embodiment, if it is expected that 6 of the compensation measurements performed by an interfering device are photocurrent measurements, detection could be performed for 7 intervals before starting compensation measurements if no non-constant illumination is detected. If another device were performing compensation measurements including six photocurrent measurements, one of the 6 photocurrent measurements would be expected to occur within a sequence of 7 intervals.
- the various photocurrent measurements included in the compensation measurement sequence are not equally detectable. Some of the photocurrent measurements may be easier to detect, and more likely to cause interference, than others. This may particularly be the case in embodiments with emitter modules containing emission LED elements emitting different colors of light. Certain combinations of LED element and detector may result in significantly higher photocurrent signals. Measurements using these emitter/detector combinations may be referred to as “beacon” measurements.
- the magnitude of the photocurrent signal for a particular measurement depends on factors including the luminous flux emitted by the LED element, the sensitivity of the detector, and how well the emitter and detector are matched in terms of spectral response. As an example, one measurement for a multi-color emission module that may result in a relatively high photocurrent signal is measurement of a green emission LED element using a detector configured to detect red light (in an embodiment, the detector is a red LED configured as a detector).
- the number of detection intervals used before starting compensation measurements may be chosen such that one of these higher-photocurrent signals would be expected to occur if a nearby device is performing compensation measurements. If the sequence of the measurements is not known, for example, 11 intervals without detection of a non-constant illumination would be needed to be certain that one of the 2 “beacon” measurements should have occurred if interfering measurements are in progress. Alternatively, if the 2 “beacon” measurements are known to be evenly spaced within the measurement sequence (6 measurements apart, in this example), 6 intervals without detection of a non-constant illumination would be sufficient before beginning compensation measurements.
- detection intervals 1310 are used to determine whether measurements taken by another lamp can be detected. If no other measurements are detected, compensation measurements are initiated during subsequent intervals denoted in FIG. 13A as measurement intervals 1320 .
- the necessary number of detection intervals 1310 in which no interfering measurement is detected depends on factors such as the number, nature and sequencing of compensation measurements, as discussed further above.
- the specific measurements illustrated in FIG. 13A as being performed during the first of measurement intervals 1320 are merely exemplary.
- Non-sensitive measurements are measurements not affected significantly by external illumination.
- non-sensitive measurements include forward voltage measurements across an LED element or a photodetector. As discussed further above in connection with FIG. 12 , such forward voltage measurements are expected to be non-sensitive if the forward-bias induced current in the measured LED element is large compared to the photocurrent induced by the external illumination.
- a timing sequence such as that of FIG.
- non-sensitive measurements 13B may allow non-sensitive measurements to be taken earlier, while it is still being determined whether measurements sensitive to interfering illumination (denoted as sensitive measurements 1324 ) can be taken without interference.
- detection for interfering measurements may be performed during the same interval as one of non-sensitive measurements 1322 , as long as the detector used for detecting interference is not involved in the non-sensitive measurement.
- the non-sensitive measurement is a forward voltage measurement
- the forward voltage measurement would need to be performed at a non-illuminating level of drive current to avoid error in performing detection at the same time.
- the expected measurement sequence of any interfering devices would need to include enough consecutive higher-intensity measurements that a measurement sequence performed by a nearby device would be detected during one of the intervals when detection is performed.
- higher-intensity measurements performed by an interfering device would need to be grouped so that at least two of the high-intensity measurements are performed in consecutive intervals.
- the interfering device is performing measurements and one high-intensity measurement occurs in the same interval as a non-sensitive measurement 1322 and is not detected, the other consecutive high-intensity measurement would be detected during either the preceding or succeeding detection interval 1310 .
- FIGS. 13A and 13B illustrate examples of an approach in which some number of detection intervals is used to obtain an indication that no nearby device is performing interfering measurements.
- compensation measurements are initiated during subsequent intervals.
- a non-constant illumination is detected during a detection interval, this is an indication that a nearby device is performing interfering measurements. Detection of a constant illumination during the interval is not associated with an interfering measurement in such an embodiment, because the effects of a constant external illumination on a photocurrent measurement can be removed by ambient subtraction such as that illustrated in FIG. 11A .
- detection can be performed by taking photocurrent measurements during each of two portions of the interval, and then subtracting the photocurrents, in the manner described above for FIG. 11A .
- a non-zero result of the subtraction in such an embodiment indicates a non-constant illumination during the interval.
- detection of a non-constant illumination during a detection interval causes an illumination device to discontinue the detection sequence and return to driving the emission LED elements in the device to provide continuous illumination.
- the illumination device may be returned to a continuous illumination state uninterrupted by detection intervals or measurement intervals, similar to illumination periods 1010 of FIG. 10 above.
- a sequence of alternating illumination periods and intervals with the emission LED elements turned to non-operative levels may be continued after the detection sequence is discontinued, but without measurement taking place during the intervals.
- any intervals present after the detection sequence is suspended would not be used for detection or measurement until such time that a detection sequence is restarted.
- the measurement control circuit of the illumination device waits, in one embodiment, for some delay time before restarting the detection sequence.
- the delay time is a randomized delay time.
- the measurement control circuit may in one embodiment start again at the beginning of the detection sequence that was aborted upon detection of the non-continuous illumination.
- the detection sequence may be picked up at a point after the beginning of the sequence.
- the detection sequence is started again at the point in the sequence when the non-continuous illumination was previously detected.
- Such an embodiment may be suitable, for example, in a sequence such as that of FIG. 13B in which some non-sensitive measurements are performed successfully in an earlier detection sequence before it is aborted.
- detection of a non-constant illumination during one or more detection intervals may allow a measurement control circuit to predict which upcoming intervals will or will not contain interfering measurements.
- the measurement control circuit may be able to select a starting interval for its own measurement sequence such that each of the two devices is able to complete its respective measurement sequence without obtaining erroneous results.
- FIG. 14 An example of such a scenario is illustrated by FIG. 14 .
- the pair of timing diagrams in FIG. 14 is for two emitter modules, designated Lamp A and Lamp B, similar to those described in the discussion of FIG. 12 above.
- Each lamp is operating in a compensation mode such as that within a compensation period 1020 of FIG. 10 , in which periods of illumination 1402 are interrupted by intervals including intervals 1410 , 1420 , 1430 , 1440 and 1450 .
- the emission LED elements within the lamp are turned off (or to a non-illuminating level) and detection may be performed or a measurement associated with a particular LED element and/or detector may be taken.
- intervals 1410 and 1420 are detection intervals for Lamp A. These intervals are measurement intervals for Lamp B, however.
- Lamp B is carrying out a sequence of 8 measurements in which a forward voltage for each of four emission LED elements is followed by a measurement of photocurrent induced in a detector when a drive current is applied to that LED element.
- the lower timing diagram in FIG. 14 therefore shows the entire sequence of measurements carried out by Lamp B.
- this measurement sequence is repeated continuously using subsequent intervals.
- the lamp returns to a continuous illumination mode such as an illumination period 1010 of FIG. 10 , and the measurement sequence is repeated if a change in operating conditions is detected or at certain preset times.
- Lamp B carries out a forward voltage measurement V f1B of a first emission LED element. Even in an embodiment for which Lamps A and B are in close proximity and/or facing one another, Lamp A does not detect any significant non-constant illumination from the measurement by Lamp B as long as the drive current for the measurement V f1B is at a level too low to result in illumination. During interval 1420 , however, Lamp A does, in this embodiment, detect a non-constant illumination associated with the measurement by Lamp B of photocurrent I ph1B induced in a detector when the first LED element is illuminated. In the embodiment of FIG.
- the sequence of measurements employed by potentially interfering lamps, including Lamp B, is known to the control circuit of Lamp A, and Lamp A employs the same sequence for its own compensation measurements.
- the control circuit of Lamp A determines that an interfering lamp made a photocurrent measurement during that interval. Because the measurement sequence is known to alternate photocurrent measurements with non-illuminating forward voltage measurements, the control circuit of Lamp A can predict that the interfering lamp will make a forward voltage measurement during the next interval, interval 1430 . Because the measurement sequence begins with a forward voltage measurement, the control circuit of Lamp A waits for one additional interval and begins the measurement sequence for Lamp A at interval 1440 . In this way, the photocurrent measurements by Lamp B line up in the same intervals as the non-sensitive, and non-interfering, forward voltage measurements by Lamp A.
- both Lamps A and B can keep repeating the measurement sequence continuously in subsequent intervals, if desired, without interfering with each other's measurements.
- An approach such as that of FIG. 14 in which potentially interfering lamps perform measurement sequences in an overlapping manner that avoids interference, may be particularly suitable for embodiments in which a measurement sequence is repeated continuously.
- the alternate approach described above, of suspending measurements when an interference is detected and attempting measurements again after a delay may be less effective.
- the control circuit of Lamp A can determine an interval for starting a non-interfering measurement sequence after detection of just one interfering measurement.
- control circuit may need to detect multiple interfering measurements in order to determine a starting interval for a non-interfering measurement sequence. In the case of some measurement sequences, overlapping but non-interfering measurement sequences may not be available.
- the approach of FIG. 14 depends on access by the control circuit of an illumination device to the measurement sequence used by potential interfering devices.
- One embodiment in which the control circuit may have such information is an installation in which the lamps in close proximity to one another are all made by the same manufacturer and use the same control sequence.
- a control circuit has information on measurement sequences of potential interfering lamps because the lamps in close proximity to one another are manufactured to a common standard that specifies the measurement sequence.
- information regarding the measurement sequences of various other lamps may in some embodiments be available to the control circuit of an illumination device.
- An illumination device may in certain embodiments include a data structure storing configuration information including compensation measurement sequences for various potentially interfering lamp models.
- the control circuit may need to detect multiple interfering measurements before determining which measurement sequence is being used by another device and whether overlapping measurement sequences are possible without interference.
- FIGS. 13 and 14 describe ways that detection during some number of intervals before performing compensation measurements during subsequent intervals can help to avoid measurement errors caused by interfering measurements by nearby illumination devices. In some cases, however, measurement errors may occur despite use of the above-described detection techniques. For example, a prediction that a lamp may safely begin making measurements based on the expected measurement sequence of a single interfering lamp may be in error if multiple nearby lamps are making measurements. As another example, measurement errors can occur if two or more lamps are performing detection during the same intervals and, each detecting no other measurements, both begin measurements at the same time.
- measurement errors are detected by checking to see whether a measured value is within an expected range.
- the expected range is based on the most recently stored value of the measured quantity.
- the expected range accounts for the magnitude of expected variations in the measured quantity caused by factors such as LED aging or temperature change of an LED element.
- a measured value is outside of the expected range if it varies by more than about 5 percent from the most recently stored value of the measured quantity.
- a measured value is outside of the expected range if it varies by more than about 3 percent from the most recently stored value.
- a measured value is outside of the expected range if it varies by more than about 2 percent from the most recently stored value.
- a measurement out-of-range may be used, depending on factors such as the volatility of the particular quantity being measured and the degree of accuracy required for compensation and control of the illumination device. If the measured value is outside of the expected range, the measured value is discarded rather than stored. In an embodiment, the measurement sequence continues after an out-of range measurement is detected, with in-range measurements stored while out-of-range measurements are discarded. In an alternative embodiment, an out-of-range measurement causes the measurement sequence to be suspended. In such an embodiment, the control circuit of the illumination device may wait for a delay time and then attempt the measurement sequence again. The new attempt may start at the beginning of the sequence, or alternatively may start with the measurement that was out of range. In another embodiment in which the measurement sequence is suspended after an out-of-range measurement, the control circuit may wait for a delay time and then begin a detection sequence before attempting measurements again.
- Checking for whether a measurement is in range is in some embodiments combined with methods described above for detection during some number of intervals before performing compensation measurements.
- measurements are performed without any detection intervals beforehand, with the measured values checked for being out of an expected range.
- measurements are initially performed without detection beforehand, but if an out-of-range value is obtained, a detection method as described above is employed before resuming measurements.
- checking for whether a measurement is in range is performed only for interference-sensitive measurements such as photocurrent measurements. In other embodiments, all measured values are checked for being within an expected range.
- Approaches described above to avoiding interference from nearby illumination devices when performing compensation measurements include performing detection to predict interference-free intervals for taking measurements, checking measured values to determine whether measurement error has occurred, and suspending and reattempting detection and/or measurements in the event that interference is detected.
- Another approach to avoiding interference is to use a different set of intervals than that used by a potentially interfering device.
- one set of periodic intervals is established having a first offset time from a periodic timing reference, while another set of periodic intervals is established having a second offset time from the timing reference.
- An exemplary timing diagram illustrating such an embodiment is shown in FIG. 15 .
- a timing reference signal 1520 is generated from an AC reference signal 1510 .
- timing reference signal 1520 is generated from AC signal 1510 using a phase locked loop (PLL) circuit.
- PLL phase locked loop
- reference signal 1520 has a frequency of six times that of AC signal 1510 .
- AC signal 1510 is the AC mains signal, typically having a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
- reference signal 1520 has a frequency of 360 Hz in the embodiment of FIG. 15 .
- Waveform 1530 illustrates the drive current variation with time for an illumination device, such as an emitter module, using a first set of intervals for compensation measurements. As discussed in connection with FIG.
- “on” current I on represents a combination of one or more different drive currents applied as appropriate to respective different LED elements within the illumination device, to produce the desired illumination.
- the drive currents are reduced to a level I off at which none of the LED elements are operating, or illuminated, except for a single LED element that may be subject to measurement during the interval.
- Each of the intervals has a duration 1532 and is separated from a rising edge of timing reference 1520 by a first offset 1536 .
- Waveform 1540 illustrates the drive current variation with time for an illumination device using a second set of intervals for compensation measurements. Waveform 1540 is similar to waveform 1530 , except that the periodic intervals in waveform 1540 are separated from a rising edge of timing reference 1520 by a second offset 1546 .
- one emitter module is configured to perform compensation measurements using a first set of measurement intervals such as those of waveform 1530
- another emitter module is configured to perform its compensation measurements using a second set of measurement intervals such as those of waveform 1540
- measurements by the two emitter modules will not interfere with one another because the two sets of measurement intervals are displaced in time.
- lamps or emitter modules that are to be placed in close proximity are assigned to different sets of measurement intervals. Such an embodiment may be particularly suitable for illumination fixtures containing multiple lamps or emitter modules.
- an emitter module may initially use one set of measurement intervals and later switch to another set of measurement intervals if interference from nearby devices is encountered. This type of embodiment may be suitable in the case of an individual emitter module, since the configuration of lamps that it may be operated in proximity to is typically not known.
- timing reference signal 1520 has a period of approximately 2.8 milliseconds.
- the measurement intervals of waveforms 1530 and 1540 have a duration of approximately 550 microseconds while the first offset is approximately 800 microseconds and the second offset approximately 2 milliseconds. It should be noted that the measurement intervals may have any duration sufficient to perform any compensation measurement needed. In an embodiment, the measurement interval should be long enough to allow a period of measuring the desired quantity and a period for ambient measurement.
- the measurement interval duration is approximately 100 microseconds. The number of different sets of measurement intervals that may be used depends on the period of the timing reference signal and the duration of the measurement interval.
- the number of intervals in a measurement sequence is set to be an integral multiple of N.
- N the number of intervals in the measurement sequence in this embodiment would be set to a multiple of 6, even if some intervals were left empty in order to do so. In this way, repetition of the measurement sequence would cause repetitions of any individual measurement to occur at the same point in the phase of the AC signal.
- the number of intervals in the measurement sequence is instead set to a number that is not an integral multiple of N.
- repetition of the measurement sequence would cause repetitions of any individual measurement to occur at different points in the phase of the AC signal.
- values obtained from repetitions of an individual measurement are averaged.
- use of a number of measurements that is not an integral multiple of N may provide a more accurate measurement when results from repetitions of a measurement taken at different AC phase points are averaged.
- FIGS. 16A through 16C Flowcharts of exemplary methods of performing interference-resistant compensation measurements using the approaches described above are shown in FIGS. 16A through 16C .
- the flowchart of FIG. 16A is for a method in which no detection is performed before beginning a sequence of measurements.
- photocurrent measurements include subtraction of ambient photocurrent, and the method includes determining whether photocurrent values are within an expected range.
- the starting point for the method is operation of one or more emission LED elements within an illumination device or emitter module at respective drive currents to produce the desired illumination (step 1602 ). This illumination is continued until the control circuit of the illumination device determines that it is time to take compensation measurements (decision 1604 ).
- compensation measurements are performed at specific times.
- the measurements may be performed when a change is detected in operating conditions, such as temperature of the illumination device or a change in drive current supplied to one or more of the emission LEDs to alter the lumen output or color point setting of the illumination device.
- periodic compensation measurement intervals may be created throughout the time the illumination fixture is operating, and compensation measurement sequences may be continually repeated using those intervals.
- a measurement counter is initialized to keep track of which measurements in a measurement sequence have been performed (step 1606 ). All of the emission LED elements are then turned off (to non-operative or non-illuminating levels) at the start of the next measurement interval (step 1608 ).
- the measurement interval is one of a set of intervals such as those discussed in connection with FIGS. 6, 8 and 10-15 above. If the measurement to be performed is not a photocurrent measurement, the measurement is performed during the interval and the result of the measurement is stored (decision 1610 , step 1612 , step 1614 ).
- a non-photocurrent measurement may include, for example, a forward voltage measurement across an emission LED or a photodetector. Methods of performing forward voltage measurements are described further in the co-pending applications referenced herein. After the result is stored, the measurement counter is incremented and the emission LED elements are turned back on to produce illumination (steps 1616 , 1618 ).
- the emission LED element to be tested is turned on using the desired drive current during a first part of the measurement interval (decision 1610 and step 1622 ). In one embodiment, the emission LED element is turned on for half of the measurement interval. In other embodiments, the emission LED element is turned on for a different fraction of the measurement interval.
- the photocurrent on a detector within the illumination device or emitter module is measured during the part of the measurement interval when the tested LED element is turned on (step 1624 ).
- the detector used in the measurement may be referred to herein as a measurement photodetector and the photocurrent detected by the measurement may be referred to as a measurement photocurrent.
- the tested LED element is turned off (while the other emission LED elements remain turned off) (step 1626 ).
- the ambient or background photocurrent induced in the detector is measured during this second part of the measurement interval (step 1628 ).
- the photocurrent values may be obtained using averaging and/or other signal processing techniques known to those of ordinary skill in the art in view of this disclosure.
- the first part of the measurement interval during which the LED element is turned on is at the beginning of the interval, as illustrated by portion 1104 of FIG. 11 . In other embodiments, the first part is at the end of the interval, and the ambient measurement in the second part of the interval is done before the measurement of photocurrent from the driven LED element.
- the ambient photocurrent is subtracted from the photocurrent induced by the driven emission LED element to obtain a corrected photocurrent (step 1630 ). In an embodiment, this subtraction is done in hardware.
- the corrected photocurrent is then checked to see whether it is within an expected range (decision 1632 ). In an embodiment, the expected range is based on a target value of the photocurrent, or on the most recent reliable measured value. The expected range is in some embodiments set to be larger than the expected variation of the photocurrent caused by temperature variation or LED aging. If the corrected photocurrent is within the expected range, it is stored (step 1614 ) and the measurement counter is incremented (step 1616 ).
- the measurement sequence is suspended when an out-of-range measurement is discovered. In such an embodiment, the measurement sequence may be re-attempted after a delay time or after changing to a different set of measurement intervals.
- one or more of the emission LED elements are again operated to produce the desired illumination (step 1618 ).
- the drive currents applied to the respective LED elements to obtain desired illumination may be adjusted, as described further in the co-pending applications referenced herein.
- the sequence of measurements is continued, with any photocurrent measurements either stored or discarded, until the end of the sequence (decision 1620 ).
- a new measurement sequence may be started as determined by the control circuit (decision 1604 ).
- measurement sequences may be repeated continually in some embodiments, or performed only at certain times or under certain conditions. In one embodiment, a measurement sequence is repeated if an out-of-range measurement is detected in the previous sequence.
- FIG. 16A Variations of the method of FIG. 16A will be recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art in view of this disclosure. For example, for this and all flowcharts described herein, a group of steps in between two decision points of the flowchart may often be performed in more than one order.
- FIG. 16A performs ambient subtraction only for photocurrent measurements, in another embodiment a similar scheme of interval portions and subtraction could be used for non-photocurrent measurements. In some embodiments, non-photocurrent measurements can also be checked for being within an expected range.
- FIG. 16B An exemplary flowchart for a method of detecting during a series of intervals prior to starting compensation measurements is shown in FIG. 16B .
- the method begins with operation of one or more emission LED elements to produce the desired illumination (step 1602 ). This illumination is continued until the control circuit of the illumination device determines that it is time to take compensation measurements (decision 1604 ). After it is determined that compensation measurements are to be taken, the control circuit initializes a counter for “collisions,” or determinations that another device is making a measurement during an interval. Counters are also initialized for free intervals, or intervals in which no measurement by another device is detected, and for contiguous free intervals since the last collision (step 1634 ).
- All of the emission LED elements are turned “off”, or to non-operative levels, at the start of the next interval (step 1636 ), which in the embodiment of FIG. 16B is used as a detection interval similar to intervals 1310 in FIG. 13 .
- the photocurrent induced in a detector within the illumination device is monitored during the detection interval (step 1638 ).
- the detector used during a detection interval may be referred to herein as a “detection interval photodetector,” and the photocurrent induced during the detection interval as “detection photocurrent.”
- the detection interval photodetector and measurement photodetector used during compensation measurements are the same photodetector.
- the detection interval photodetector and measurement photodetectors are different detectors.
- different measurement photodetectors are used for photocurrent measurements of different LED elements. Such embodiments may allow a more favorable combination of wavelengths of the tested LED element and the photodetector.
- any of the detectors referenced herein may be either a dedicated photodetector or an LED element temporarily configured as a photodetector.
- a “free” interval is recorded by incrementing the free interval counter and contiguous free interval counter (step 1658 ).
- the emission LED elements are turned back on to resume illumination at the end of the interval (step 1656 ).
- a number of contiguous free intervals has been designated as an indicator that no other device is likely to be taking measurements using the same set of intervals. Considerations for determining a suitable number of free contiguous intervals are described above in the discussion of FIGS. 12 and 13 .
- compensation measurements are started in the next interval (decision 1660 and step 1662 ). Measurements may then proceed in any suitable manner, including a manner similar to that illustrated in FIG. 16A .
- the collision counter is incremented and the contiguous free interval counter is reset (decision 1640 and steps 1644 and 1646 ).
- the emission LED elements are turned back on as usual to resume illumination at the end of the interval (step 1642 ).
- the control circuit waits for a delay time before attempting detection again (decision 1648 , steps 1650 and 1636 ).
- the delay time is a randomized delay time.
- the delay time is determined using the collision counter, such that after each successive collision the delay time is progressively longer. For example, in one embodiment the delay time is randomized within a specific range, and that range is set to progressively higher values after each successive collision. In a further embodiment, the delay time increases after each successive collision at an exponential rate.
- detection of non-constant illumination refers to detection of illumination having an intensity that varies substantially with time during the detection interval, or during a portion of the detection interval in which detection is performed.
- illumination intensity varies substantially with time if the variation would be large enough to induce a significant error in a photocurrent measurement conducted during the same interval.
- a substantial variation in intensity is defined in terms of the intensity of illumination produced by a photocurrent measurement within the illumination device performing a method such as that of FIG. 16B .
- a substantial variation in intensity is defined in terms of the intensity of illumination produced by the LED element within the illumination device producing the lowest illumination intensity during photocurrent measurements performed as part of a compensation measurement sequence.
- a substantial variation in intensity with time may be defined in one embodiment as a variation large enough that the change in intensity during the interval is greater than about 5% of the intensity produced by the LED element within the illumination device having the lowest illumination intensity during photocurrent measurements.
- a substantial variation is a variation large enough that the change in intensity during the interval is greater than about 3% of the intensity produced by the LED element within the illumination device having the lowest illumination intensity during photocurrent measurements.
- a substantial variation is a variation large enough that the change in intensity during the interval is greater than about 2% of the intensity produced by the LED element within the illumination device having the lowest illumination intensity during photocurrent measurements.
- Other thresholds for detecting interference may be used, depending on factors such as the degree of accuracy required for compensation and control of the illumination device.
- a maximum number of collisions may be reached (decision 1648 ).
- the control circuit changes to a different series of measurement intervals, separated from a timing reference by a different offset time (step 1652 ). Such sets of intervals are described above in connection with waveforms 1530 and 1540 in FIG. 15 .
- the detection sequence is restarted by resetting all counters after a change to a new set of intervals (step 1634 ).
- a change to a new series of intervals such as that of FIG. 16B may be particularly suitable in the case of an illumination device including a single lamp or emission module.
- each lamp may be assigned to a specific interval series in order to avoid interference between them, such that changing of the interval series could in some cases increase the likelihood of interference.
- a collision is detected by monitoring the entire detection interval for non-constant illumination.
- only a portion of the detection interval is monitored, based on knowledge of when during the interval a change in illumination intensity caused by an interfering measurement is expected to take place.
- the expected intensity variation may be associated with a transition between driving an LED element for a photocurrent measurement and having the LED element turned off for an ambient photocurrent measurement, as shown in FIG. 11A .
- the monitoring can be done over a range including that transition time.
- FIG. 16C An alternative method of detecting prior to starting compensation measurements is illustrated by the flowchart of FIG. 16C .
- the method of FIG. 16C is similar in some respects to that of FIG. 16B , but in FIG. 16C there does not always have to be a certain number of contiguous free intervals detected before compensation measurements can start. In certain situations the method of FIG. 16C allows a measurement sequence to be started if it can be overlapped with an ongoing measurement sequence of another device in such a way that the measurements do not interfere with (i.e. cause measurement errors for) one another.
- FIG. 16C the context of the method is the same as for FIGS. 16A and 16B in that one or more LED elements are operated to produce the desired illumination until the control circuit of the illumination device determines that it is time to take compensation measurements (see steps 1602 and 1604 of FIGS. 16A and 16B ).
- Monitoring for non-constant illumination is performed in the same manner as for FIG. 16B , and in the event that a designated number of contiguous free intervals is reached, a measurement sequence is started in the same way as in the method of FIG. 16B (steps 1638 - 1662 , going down right side of flowchart).
- the method of FIG. 16C differs from that of FIG. 16B in the event that a collision is detected, however.
- the control circuit in the embodiment of FIG. 16C determines whether the measurement sequence causing the detected collision is known (decision 1664 ). If the interfering measurement sequence is known, the control circuit determines whether it can initiate compensation measurements that overlap with those of the other device in a manner that avoids interference (step 1670 ).
- configuration information 1700 includes measurement sequences for three different illumination devices, designated Brand A, Brand B, and Brand C. In an embodiment, the three illumination devices are made by different manufacturers.
- Configuration information 1702 is for the Brand A device, while information 1704 and 1706 is for the Brand B and Brand C devices, respectively.
- Controlled device information 1710 indicates that the controlled device (the one that configuration information 1700 is stored in) is a Brand A device in this embodiment.
- Sequence information 1708 includes the sequence of compensation measurements performed for each device.
- sequence information 1708 includes the specific measurement performed in each interval of the sequence, as well as whether the measurement is Sensitive or Non-sensitive (to external illumination) and whether the measurement is Interfering or Non-interfering.
- photocurrent measurements are all considered to be both sensitive and interfering, since photocurrent measurements both detect illumination (and are therefore sensitive to external illumination) and create illumination from the tested LED element (and therefore can interfere with another photocurrent measurement).
- forward voltage measurements whether across an emission LED element (e.g. V f1 ) or a detector (e.g. V fd1 ), are considered to be non-sensitive and non-interfering.
- a forward voltage measurement is non-interfering is believed to be a suitable assumption when the forward voltage measurements are performed with low drive current levels so that the measured devices do not produce illumination.
- a forward voltage measurement may be an interfering measurement (though probably still not a sensitive measurement).
- a forward voltage measurement can be considered non-sensitive if the forward bias induced current in the measured LED element is large with respect to any photocurrent induced by external illumination.
- the measurement sequence for each device includes two empty intervals to bring the length of the sequence to 12 intervals. Such empty intervals are non-sensitive and non-interfering.
- the 12 interval length of the measurement sequences in FIG. 17 is merely exemplary. Any number of intervals may be used to form a measurement sequence, and a set of measurement sequences included in configuration information such as configuration information 1700 may include sequences having different lengths (i.e., including different numbers of measurement intervals).
- decision block 1664 determines whether the order of interfering and non-interfering measurements within the interfering measurement sequence is known, rather than whether the actual measurements within the sequence are known.
- the remaining information in configuration data 1700 characterizes the measurement sequence for each device in ways that may be helpful in determining whether an overlapping measurement sequence can be formed.
- an overlapping but not interfering measurement sequence can be conducted as long as any sensitive measurements in one sequence of measurements performed by one device are not performed in the same interval as an interfering measurement in another sequence of measurements performed by a nearby device. Because in the embodiment of FIG. 17 sensitive measurements and interfering measurements are the same, much of the configuration information is described in terms of sensitive measurements, but is also applicable to interfering measurements.
- the rule for conducting overlapping but not interfering measurements can be restated as making sure that a sensitive measurement in one sequence is not performed in the same interval as a sensitive measurement in the other sequence.
- number of sensitive measurements 1712 indicates the number of sensitive measurements within each sequence.
- the number of non-sensitive measurements 1714 is accordingly eight for each of the devices.
- a high fraction of sensitive (or interfering) measurements in a measurement sequence can make it less likely that an overlapping measurement sequence can be performed. For example, if in an alternate embodiment the measurement sequence for the Brand A device had 7 out of 12 interfering measurements rather than 4 out of 12, it would be very difficult to overlap measurement sequences for two Brand A devices in close proximity to one another without having a sensitive measurement by one device performed in the same interval as a sensitive (and interfering) measurement by the other device.
- Same-sequence non-interfering offset 1716 refers to a number of intervals by which a device performing a measurement sequence needs to offset (i.e., delay) its sequence with respect to another device performing the same sequence. For example, if a Brand A device detected a photocurrent measurement performed by an interfering device and it was known that the interfering device was also a Brand A device, it would be known from Brand A configuration information 1702 that the next measurement, if any, by the interfering device would be a non-interfering (non-photocurrent) measurement. The detecting device could not start its measurement sequence during that next interval, because the non-interfering first measurement of its sequence would align with the non-interfering next measurement of the interfering sequence.
- an offset 1716 of either 2 or 6 intervals would allow another Brand B device to perform an overlapping measurement sequence.
- an offset of between 4 and 8 intervals would allow another Brand C device to perform an overlapping but non-interfering measurement sequence.
- interval range 1718 Another quantity included in configuration information 1700 is interval range 1718 including all sensitive measurements.
- the Brand A sequence has a range 1718 of 7 intervals, from interval 2 to interval 8 , in which all of the sensitive measurements are performed.
- the Brand B sequence has a range 1718 of 6 intervals, from interval 3 to interval 8 .
- all of the sensitive measurements are performed within a range 1718 of 4 intervals.
- Interval range 1720 of the most contiguous non-sensitive measurements within a measurement sequence is 5 for the sequence of Brand A, from interval 9 to interval 1 (assuming that the measurement sequence is continually repeated).
- interval range 1720 is 6 intervals, from interval 9 to interval 2 .
- interval range 1720 is eight intervals, from interval 5 to interval 12 .
- Interval ranges 1718 and 1720 may be useful in determining whether different measurement sequences, such as those used by different device manufacturers, may be overlapped without interference. For example, the measurement sequences of the three devices of configuration information 1700 are too different to allow non-interfering overlap of two different device sequences using a simple one- or two-interval shift.
- a larger shift can align a contiguous range of non-sensitive measurements in one sequence with the entire range of sensitive measurements in another sequence.
- the measurement sequence of Brand A in FIG. 17 can overlap with the sequence of Brand C if the Brand A sequence is shifted so that interval 2 of the Brand A sequence is aligned with interval 5 or 6 of the Brand C sequence. In this way, all of the sensitive measurements in the Brand A sequence are performed in intervals with non-sensitive measurements by the Brand C device.
- the measurement sequence of a Brand A device cannot overlap with that of a Brand B device, because there is no contiguous range of non-sensitive measurements in the Brand B sequence large enough to accommodate the range of intervals in the Brand A sequence including sensitive measurements.
- configuration information such as that of FIG. 17 may be used by the control circuit of an illumination device in determining (for decision 1664 ) whether a measurement sequence associated with a detected measurement is known.
- a single detection of an interfering measurement by another device would not in itself be enough to determine whether which of the known measurement sequences is being used by the interfering device. If the interfering measurement sequence is not known, the control circuit initiates a detection process during the next interval to get further information (N branch of decision 1664 and step 1636 ). In the embodiment of FIG.
- control circuit is able to determine a measurement sequence used by the interfering device by monitoring the collision, free interval, and contiguous free interval counters during successive intervals. For example, a sequence of a detected photocurrent measurement (i.e., a collision), followed by a non-sensitive measurement (which increments the free interval and contiguous free interval counters), followed by another sensitive measurement (which increments the collision counter and clears the contiguous free interval counter) indicates that the sequence of Brand A is used by the interfering device. A sequence of three sensitive measurements in a row, on the other hand, would indicate that the sequence of Brand C is used by the interfering device.
- a sequence of a detected photocurrent measurement i.e., a collision
- non-sensitive measurement which increments the free interval and contiguous free interval counters
- another sensitive measurement which increments the collision counter and clears the contiguous free interval counter
- the control circuit determines whether an overlapping, but non-interfering, measurement sequence by the controlled device is possible (decision 1670 ). In an embodiment, configuration information such as that of FIG. 17 is used to determine whether such an overlapping measurement configuration is possible. In addition to the considerations discussed above in connection with FIG. 17 , the control circuit may in an embodiment consider whether the measurement sequence of the controlled device should be changed. For example, in an embodiment for which an interfering device uses a different measurement sequence than the controlled device, an overlapping measurement sequence may become easier or possible if the controlled device changes its measurement sequence to be more compatible with that of the interfering device.
- Changing of a device's measurement sequence may in some embodiments make prediction of a device's behavior by other devices more difficult.
- temporary adjustment of a device's measurement sequence may be a useful option for avoiding interference.
- the measurement sequence is revised if necessary to achieve the non-interfering overlap (decision 1670 and step 1672 ).
- the measurement sequence is started in the next interval if appropriate, or delayed for a suitable number of intervals if needed to achieve a non-interfering measurement sequence (decision 1674 and step 1662 ).
- the control circuit changes to a different set of intervals and begins the detection sequence again (decision 1670 , steps 1668 and 1634 ).
- another approach such as a delay time is used instead of changing to a different set of intervals. Variations of the method of FIG. 16C will be recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art in view of this disclosure.
- configuration information for compensation measurement sequences of illumination devices may be more complex than that shown in FIG. 17 . Additional measurements may be taken in some embodiments, such as additional forward voltage measurements using alternate detectors. In some embodiments of illumination devices storing configuration information for other illumination devices, measurement sequences are not necessarily the same length for each device. In embodiments for which non-sensitive measurements are not necessarily non-interfering measurements, configuration information such as that of FIG. 17 may include quantities defined separately for sensitive measurements and interfering measurements. Analysis in such an embodiment may be more complex than that described for FIG. 17 . Variations of the methods of FIGS. 16A, 16B and 16C may be combined, resulting in many possible methods of avoiding interference-related error when performing compensation measurements for illumination devices.
- the improved methods described herein for controlling an illumination device may be used within substantially any LED illumination device having a plurality of emission LED elements and one or more photodetectors. As described in more detail below, the improved methods described herein may be implemented within an LED illumination device in the form of hardware, software or a combination of both.
- Illumination devices which benefit from the improved methods described herein, may have substantially any form factor including, but not limited to, parabolic lamps (e.g., PAR 20, 30 or 38), linear lamps, flood lights and mini-reflectors.
- the illumination devices may be installed in a ceiling or wall of a building, and may be connected to an AC mains or some other AC power source.
- AC mains or some other AC power source e.g., AC mains or some other AC power source.
- a skilled artisan would understand how the improved methods described herein may be used within other types of illumination devices powered by other power sources (e.g., batteries or solar energy).
- FIGS. 18-21 show different types of LED illumination devices, each having one or more emitter modules.
- the present invention is not limited to any particular type of LED illumination device or emitter module design. A skilled artisan would understand how the method steps described herein may be applied to other types of LED illumination devices having substantially different emitter module designs.
- FIG. 18A is a photograph of a linear lamp 1810 comprising a plurality of emitter modules (not shown in FIG. 18A ), which are spaced apart from one another and arranged generally in a line.
- each emitter module included within linear lamp 1810 includes a plurality of emission LEDs and at least one dedicated photodetector, all of which are mounted onto a common substrate and encapsulated within a primary optics structure.
- the primary optics structure may be formed from a variety of different materials and may have substantially any shape and/or dimensions necessary to shape the light emitted by the emission LEDs in a desirable manner. Although the primary optics structure is described below as a dome, one skilled in the art would understand how the primary optics structure may have substantially any other shape or configuration, which encapsulates the emission LEDs and the at least one photodetector.
- emitter module 1820 includes four differently colored emission LEDs 1830 , which are arranged in a square array and placed as close as possible together in the center of a primary optics structure (e.g., a dome) 1840 , so as to approximate a centrally located point source.
- the emission LEDs 1830 may each be configured for producing illumination at a different peak emission wavelength.
- the emission LEDs 1830 may include RGBW LEDs or RGBY LEDs.
- a dedicated photodetector 1850 is included within the dome 1840 and arranged somewhere around the periphery of the emission LED array.
- the dedicated photodetector 1850 may be any device (such as a silicon photodiode or an LED) that produces current indicative of incident light.
- FIGS. 19A and 19B illustrate a substantially different type of illumination device and emitter module design.
- FIG. 19A depicts an illumination device 1910 having a parabolic form factor (e.g., a PAR 38) and a single emitter module (not shown in FIG. 19A ).
- the emitter modules included in such devices typically include a plurality of differently colored chains of LEDs (LED elements), where each chain includes two or more LEDs of the same color.
- FIG. 19B illustrates an exemplary emitter module 1920 that may be included within the PAR lamp 1910 shown in FIG. 19A .
- emitter module 1920 includes an array of emission LEDs 1930 and a plurality of dedicated photodetectors 1950 , all of which are mounted on a common substrate and encapsulated within a primary optics structure (e.g., a dome) 1940 .
- the array of emission LEDs 1930 may include a number of differently colored chains of LEDS, wherein each chain is configured for producing illumination at a different peak emission wavelength.
- the array of emission LEDs 1930 may include a chain of four red LEDs, a chain of four green LEDs, a chain of four blue LEDs, and a chain of four white or yellow LEDs. Each chain of LEDs is coupled in series and driven with the same drive current.
- the individual LEDs in each chain may be scattered about the array, and arranged so that no color appears twice in any row, column or diagonal, to improve color mixing within the emitter module 1920 .
- the dedicated photodetectors 1950 are included within the dome 1940 and arranged around the periphery of the array.
- the dedicated photodetectors 1950 may be placed close to, and in the middle of, each edge of the array and may be connected in parallel to a receiver of the illumination device. By connecting the dedicated photodetectors 1950 in parallel with the receiver, the photocurrents induced on each photodetector may be summed to minimize the spatial variation between the similarly colored LEDs, which may be scattered about the array.
- the dedicated photodetectors 1950 may be any devices that produce current indicative of incident light (such as a silicon photodiode or an LED).
- the dedicated photodetectors 1950 are preferably LEDs with peak emission wavelengths in the range of 500 nm to 700 nm. Photodetectors with such peak emission wavelengths will not produce photocurrent in response to infrared light, which reduces interference from ambient light. To the extent some amount of ambient light is nonetheless detectable during, for example, a photocurrent measurement, methods as described herein may be used to minimize compensation errors caused by such ambient light. For example, effects of a constant ambient illumination on a photocurrent measurement may be removed by subtraction as discussed above. In the case of non-constant external illumination, methods as described herein may be used to avoid taking photocurrent measurements in the presence of such non-constant illumination.
- the illumination devices shown in FIGS. 18A and 19A and the emitter modules shown in FIGS. 18B and 19B are provided merely as examples of illumination devices in which the interference-resistant compensation methods described herein may be used. Further description of these illumination devices and emitter modules may be found in U.S. application Ser. No. 14/097,339 and U.S. Application No. 61/886,471, which are commonly assigned and incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. Still further description of additional emitter module embodiments may be found in co-pending U.S. application Ser. No. 14/314,530.
- inventive concepts described herein are not limited to any particular type of LED illumination device, any particular number of emitter modules that may be included within an LED illumination device, or any particular number, color or arrangement of emission LEDs and photodetectors that may be included within an emitter module.
- the methods described herein may contemplate only an LED illumination device including a plurality of emission LEDs and at least one photodetector.
- a dedicated photodetector may not be required, if one or more of the emission LEDs is configured, at times, to provide such functionality.
- FIG. 20 is one example of a block diagram of an illumination device 2000 configured to avoid interference-related errors when compensating for variations in parameters such as drive current, temperature, and LED characteristics.
- the illumination device illustrated in FIG. 20 provides one example of the hardware and/or software that may be used to implement interference-resistant measurement methods such as those shown in FIGS. 16A through 16C .
- illumination device 2000 comprises a plurality of emission LED elements 2045 and one or more dedicated photodetectors 2050 .
- the emission LED elements 2045 comprise four chains of any number of LEDs. In typical embodiments, each chain may have 2 to 4 LEDs of the same color, which are coupled in series and configured to receive the same drive current.
- the emission LED elements 2045 may include a chain of red LEDs, a chain of green LEDs, a chain of blue LEDs, and a chain of white or yellow LEDs.
- the methods and devices described herein are not limited to any particular number of LED chains, any particular number of LEDs within the chains, or any particular color or combination of LED colors.
- the methods and devices described herein are not limited to any particular type, number, color, combination or arrangement of photodetectors.
- the one or more dedicated photodetectors 2050 may include a small red, orange or yellow LED.
- the one or more dedicated photodetectors 128 may include one or more small red LEDs and one or more small green LEDs.
- one or more of the dedicated photodetector(s) 2050 shown in FIG. 20 may be omitted if one or more of the emission LEDs 2045 is configured, at times, to function as a photodetector.
- the plurality of emission LEDs 2045 and the (optional) dedicated photodetectors 2050 may be included within an emitter module, as discussed above.
- an illumination device may include more than one emitter module, as discussed above.
- illumination device 2000 includes various hardware and software components, which are configured for powering the illumination device and controlling the light output from the emitter module(s).
- the illumination device is connected to AC mains 2005 , and includes an AC/DC converter 2010 for converting AC mains power (e.g., 120V or 240V) to a DC voltage (V DC ).
- this DC voltage e.g., 15V
- the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 for producing the operative drive currents applied to the emission LEDs 2045 for producing illumination.
- a DC/DC converter 2015 is included for converting the DC voltage V DC (e.g., 15V) to a lower voltage V L (e.g., 3.3V), which is used to power the low voltage circuitry included within the illumination device, such as PLL 2020 , wireless interface 2025 , and control circuit 2035 .
- V DC DC voltage
- V L lower voltage
- PLL 2020 locks to the AC mains frequency (e.g., 50 or 60 HZ) and produces a high speed clock (CLK) signal and a synchronization signal (SYNC).
- CLK high speed clock
- SYNC synchronization signal
- the CLK signal provides the timing for control circuit 2035 and LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 .
- the CLK signal frequency is in the tens of MHz range (e.g., 23 MHz), and is precisely synchronized to the AC Mains frequency and phase.
- the SYNC signal is used by the control circuit 2035 to create the timing of the intervals used for the detection and compensation measurements described above.
- the SYNC signal frequency is equal to the AC Mains frequency (e.g., 50 or 60 HZ) and also has a precise phase alignment with the AC Mains.
- the SYNC signal frequency is an integral multiple of the AC mains frequency.
- timing reference signal 1520 of FIG. 15 is an example of the SYNC signal of FIG. 20 .
- a wireless interface 2025 may be included and used to calibrate the illumination device 2000 during manufacturing.
- an external calibration tool (not shown in FIG. 20 ) may communicate calibration values (e.g., luminous flux, chromaticity and/or other optical measurement values) to an illumination device under test via the wireless interface 2025 .
- the calibration values received via the wireless interface 2025 may be stored in the table of calibration values within a storage medium 2030 of the control circuit 2035 , for example.
- the control circuit 2035 may use the calibration values to generate calibration coefficients, which are stored within the storage medium 2030 in addition to, or in lieu of, the received calibration values.
- Wireless interface 2025 is not limited to receiving only calibration data, and may be used for communicating information and commands for many other purposes.
- wireless interface 2025 could be used during normal operation to communicate commands, which may be used to control the illumination device 2000 , or to obtain information about the illumination device 2000 .
- commands may be communicated to the illumination device 2000 via the wireless interface 2025 to turn the illumination device on/off, to control the dimming level and/or color set point of the illumination device, to initiate the calibration procedure, or to store calibration results in memory.
- wireless interface 2025 may be used to obtain status information or fault condition codes associated with illumination device 2000 .
- wireless interface 2025 could operate according to ZigBee, WiFi, Bluetooth, or any other proprietary or standard wireless data communication protocol. In other embodiments, wireless interface 2025 could communicate using radio frequency (RF), infrared (IR) light or visible light. In alternative embodiments, a wired interface could be used, in place of the wireless interface 2025 shown, to communicate information, data and/or commands over the AC mains or a dedicated conductor or set of conductors.
- RF radio frequency
- IR infrared
- a wired interface could be used, in place of the wireless interface 2025 shown, to communicate information, data and/or commands over the AC mains or a dedicated conductor or set of conductors.
- the control circuit 2035 uses the timing signals received from PLL 2020 to calculate and produces values indicating the desired drive current to be used for each LED chain 2045 .
- This information may be communicated from the control circuit 2035 to the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 over a serial bus conforming to a standard, such as SPI or I 2 C, for example.
- the control circuit 2035 may provide a latching signal that instructs the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 to simultaneously change the drive currents supplied to each of the LEDs 2045 to prevent brightness and color artifacts.
- Control circuit 2035 may be configured for determining the respective drive currents needed to achieve a desired luminous flux and/or a desired chromaticity for the illumination device in accordance with one or more compensation methods as described above in connection with FIGS. 6-9 and described further in the co-pending applications referenced herein.
- Control circuit 2035 is further configured for operations described herein in connection with avoiding interference. Depending on the particular embodiment such operations include, for example, determining whether an interfering photocurrent measurement is made by another device during a detection interval or measurement interval, waiting for a delay time before continuing to monitor detection intervals, changing to a different series of intervals, determining whether detection has indicated that compensation measurements may be started without likely interference, or determining the measurement sequence used by an interfering device.
- control circuit 2035 may determine the respective drive currents and perform the interference-related operations described herein by executing program instructions stored within the storage medium 2030 .
- the storage medium may be a non-volatile memory, and may be configured for storing the program instructions along with a table of calibration values used in the compensation methods and a data structure including configuration information such as that of FIG. 17 .
- the control circuit 2035 may include combinational logic for determining the desired drive currents or performing other operations, such that program instructions for determining drive currents are not stored on storage medium 2030 .
- operations of control circuit 2035 may be carried out using a combination of program instructions and combinational logic.
- Storage medium 2030 includes a plurality of storage locations addressable by control circuit 2035 or a processor such as that associated with controller 2190 in FIG. 21 for storing software programs and data associated with the methods described herein.
- storage medium 2030 and other memory or storage media described herein may be implemented using any combination of built-in volatile or non-volatile memory, including random-access memory (RAM) and read-only memory (ROM) and integrated or peripheral storage devices such as magnetic disks, optical disks, solid state drives or flash drives.
- RAM random-access memory
- ROM read-only memory
- storage medium 2030 may be used to store one or more counters such as the collision counter, free interval counter, and contiguous free interval counters described in connection with FIGS. 16B and 16C above.
- the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 may include a number (N) of driver blocks 2115 equal to the number of emission LED chains 2045 included within the illumination device.
- LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 comprises four driver blocks 2115 , each configured to produce illumination from a different one of the emission LED chains 2045 .
- the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 also comprises the circuitry needed to measure ambient temperature (optional), the detector and/or emitter forward voltages, and the detector photocurrents, and to adjust the LED drive currents accordingly.
- Each driver block 2115 receives data indicating a desired drive current from the control circuit 2035 , along with a latching signal indicating when the driver block 2115 should change the drive current.
- FIG. 21 is an exemplary block diagram of an LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 , according to one embodiment of the invention.
- the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 includes four driver blocks 2115 , each block including a buck converter 2120 , a current source 2125 , and an LC filter 2145 for generating the drive currents that are supplied to a connected emission LED element 2045 (a) to produce illumination and obtain forward voltage (Vfe) measurements.
- buck converter 2120 may produce a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage output (Vdr) when the controller 2190 drives the “Out_En” signal high.
- PWM pulse width modulated
- This voltage signal (Vdr) is filtered by the LC filter 2145 to produce a forward voltage on the anode of the connected LED chain 2045 (a).
- the cathode of the LED chain is connected to the current source 2125 , which forces a fixed drive current equal to the value provided by the “Emitter Current” signal through the LED chain 2045 (a) when the “Led_On” signal is high.
- the “Vc” signal from the current source 2125 provides feedback to the buck converter 2120 to output the proper duty cycle and minimize the voltage drop across the current source 2125 .
- each driver block 2115 includes a difference amplifier 2140 for measuring the forward voltage drop (Vfe) across the chain of emission LEDs 2045 a.
- the buck converter 2120 is turned off and the current source 2125 is configured for drawing a relatively small drive current (e.g., about 1 mA) through the connected chain of emission LEDs 2045 (a).
- the voltage drop (Vfe) produced across the LED chain 2045 (a) by that current is measured by the difference amplifier 2140 .
- the difference amplifier 2140 produces a signal that is equal to the forward voltage (Vfe) drop across the emission LED chain 2045 (a) during forward voltage measurements.
- the driver blocks 2115 may include additional circuitry for measuring the photocurrents (Iph_d 2 ), which are induced across an emission LED, when the emission LED is configured for detecting incident light.
- each driver block 2115 may include a transimpedance amplifier 2130 , which generally functions to convert an input current to an output voltage proportional to a feedback resistance. As shown in FIG.
- transimpedance amplifier 2130 the positive terminal of transimpedance amplifier 2130 is connected to the Vdr output of the buck converter 2120 , while the negative terminal is connected to the cathode of the last LED in the LED chain 2045 (a).
- Transimpedance amplifier 2130 is enabled when the “LED_On” signal is low. When the “LED_On” signal is high, the output of transimpedance amplifier 2130 is tri-stated.
- the buck converters 2120 connected to all other emission LEDs should be turned off to avoid visual artifacts produced by LED current transients.
- the buck converter 2120 coupled to the emission LED under test should also be turned off to prevent switching noise within the buck converter from interfering with the photocurrent measurements.
- the Vdr output of the buck converter 2120 coupled to the emission LED under test is held to a particular value (e.g., about 2-3.5 volts times the number of emission LEDs in the chain) by the capacitor within LC filter 2145 .
- the transimpedance amplifier 2130 When this voltage (Vdr) is supplied to the anode of emission LED under test and the positive terminal of the transimpedance amplifier 2130 , the transimpedance amplifier produces an output voltage (relative to Vdr) that is supplied to the positive terminal of difference amplifier 2135 .
- Difference amplifier 2135 compares the output voltage of transimpedance amplifier 2130 to Vdr and generates a difference signal, which corresponds to the photocurrent (Iph_d 2 ) induced across the LED chain 2045 (a).
- the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 may include one or more receiver blocks 2150 for measuring the forward voltages (Vfd) and photocurrents (Iph_d 1 or Iph_d 2 ) induced across the one or more dedicated photodetectors 2050 .
- Vfd forward voltages
- Iph_d 1 or Iph_d 2 photocurrents
- the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 may generally include a number of receiver blocks 2150 equal to the number of dedicated photodetectors included within the emitter module.
- receiver block 2150 comprises a voltage source 2155 , which is coupled for supplying a DC voltage (Vdr) to the anode of the dedicated photodetector 2050 coupled to the receiver block, while the cathode of the photodetector 2050 is connected to current source 2160 .
- the controller 2190 supplies a “Detector_On” signal to the current source 2160 , which forces a fixed drive current (Idrv) equal to the value provided by the “Detector Current” signal through photodetector 2050 .
- current source 2160 When obtaining detector forward voltage (Vfd) measurements, current source 2160 is configured for drawing a relatively small amount of drive current (Idrv) through photodetector 2050 .
- the voltage drop (Vfd) produced across photodetector 2050 by that current is measured by difference amplifier 2175 , which produces a signal equal to the forward voltage (Vfd) drop across photodetector 2050 .
- the drive current (Idrv) forced through photodetector 2050 by the current source 2160 is generally a relatively small, non-operative drive current. In the embodiment in which four dedicated photodetectors 2050 are coupled in parallel, the non-operative drive current may be roughly 1 mA. However, smaller/larger drive currents may be used in embodiments that include fewer/greater numbers of photodetectors, or embodiments that do not connect the photodetectors in parallel.
- receiver block 2150 also includes circuitry for measuring the photocurrents (Iph_d 1 or Iph_d 2 ) induced on photodetector 2050 by ambient light, as well as light emitted by the emission LEDs.
- the positive terminal of transimpedance amplifier 2165 is coupled to the Vdr output of voltage source 2155 , while the negative terminal is connected to the cathode of photodetector 2050 .
- the transimpedance amplifier 2165 produces an output voltage relative to Vdr (e.g., about 0-1V), which is supplied to the positive terminal of difference amplifier 2170 .
- Difference amplifier 2170 compares the output voltage to Vdr and generates a difference signal, which corresponds to the photocurrent (Iph_d 1 or Iph_d 2 ) induced across photodetector 2050 .
- Transimpedance amplifier 2165 is enabled when the “Detector_On” signal is low. When the “Detector_On” signal is high, the output of transimpedance amplifier 2165 is tri-stated.
- some embodiments of the invention may scatter the individual LEDs within each chain of LEDs 2045 about the array of LEDs, so that no two LEDs of the same color exist in any row, column or diagonal (see, e.g., FIG. 19B ).
- the photocurrents (Iph_d 1 or Iph_d 2 ) induced on each photodetector 2050 by the LEDs of a given color may be summed to minimize the spatial variation between the similarly colored LEDs, which are scattered about the array.
- the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 may also include a multiplexor (Mux) 2180 , an analog to digital converter (ADC) 2185 , a controller 2190 , and an optional temperature sensor 2195 .
- multiplexor 2180 may be coupled for receiving the emitter forward voltage (Vfe) and the (optional) photocurrent (Iph_d 2 ) measurements from the driver blocks 2115 , and the detector forward voltage (Vfd) and detector photocurrent (Iph_d 1 and/or Iph_d 2 ) measurements from the receiver block 2150 .
- the ADC 2185 digitizes the emitter forward voltage (Vfe) and the optional photocurrent (Iph_d 2 ) measurements output from the driver blocks 2115 , and the detector forward voltage (Vfd) and detector photocurrent (Iph_d 1 and/or Iph_d 2 ) measurements output from the receiver block 2150 , and provides the results to the controller 2190 .
- the controller 2190 determines when to take forward voltage and photocurrent measurements and produces the Out_En, Emitter Current and Led_On signals, which are supplied to the driver blocks 2115 , and the Detector Current and Detector_On signals, which are supplied to the receiver block 2150 as shown in FIG. 21 .
- the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 may include an optional temperature sensor 2195 for taking ambient temperature (Ta) measurements.
- multiplexor 2180 may also be coupled for multiplexing the ambient temperature (Ta) with the forward voltage and photocurrent measurements sent to the ADC 2185 .
- the temperature sensor 2195 may be a thermistor, and may be included on the driver circuit chip for measuring the ambient temperature surrounding the LEDs, or a temperature from the heat sink of the emitter module. If the optional temperature sensor 2195 is included, the output of the temperature sensor may be used in some embodiments to determine if a significant change in temperature is detected. In some embodiments detection of a significant change in temperature may cause compensation measurements to be initiated.
- FIGS. 20-21 One implementation of an improved illumination device 2000 has now been described in reference to FIGS. 20-21 . Further description of such an illumination device may be found in commonly assigned U.S. application Ser. Nos. 13/970,944; 13/970,964; 13/970,990; and 14/097,339. A skilled artisan would understand how the illumination device could be alternatively implemented within the scope of the methods and devices described herein.
- FIG. 22 An exemplary block diagram of circuit components for an illumination device including multiple emitter modules is shown in FIG. 22 .
- the circuit components are housed on a power supply board 2202 and emitter board 2204 which are dimensioned to fit within the housing of a linear illumination device.
- An external view of an embodiment of such a linear illumination device is shown in FIG. 18A .
- Emitter board 2204 in the embodiment of FIG. 22 includes 6 emitter modules 2212 arranged in a linear row.
- FIG. 18B A representation of a top view of an exemplary embodiment of emitter module 2212 is shown in FIG. 18B .
- power supply board 2202 comprises AC/DC converter 2206 and controller 2208 .
- AC/DC converter 2206 converters AC mains power to a DC voltage of typically 15-20V, which is then used to power controller 2208 and emitter board 2204 .
- the DC voltage from AC/DC converter 2206 may be converted to lower voltages as well elsewhere within the illumination device.
- Controller 2208 communicates with emitter board 2204 through a digital control bus, in this example. Controller 2208 could comprise a wireless, power line, or any other type of communication interface to enable the color of the linear illumination device to be adjusted.
- controller 2208 also provides to each of interface circuits 2210 a timing signal and an offset from the timing signal at which measurement intervals and/or detection intervals for the associated emitter module are to occur.
- adjacently positioned emitter modules within the illumination device are assigned different offsets from the timing reference, so that compensation measurements performed by adjacent emitter modules are performed using non-overlapping sets of intervals.
- an illumination device including six emitter modules such as that illustrated in FIG. 22 uses three different offsets from a timing reference: a first offset for the first and fourth emitter modules (counting from one end of the device), a second offset for the second and fifth emitter modules, and a third offset for the third and sixth emitter modules.
- a different number of offsets may be used, including the use of a different offset for each individual emitter module.
- emitter board 2204 comprises six emitter modules 2212 and six interface circuits 2210 .
- Interface circuits 2210 communicate with controller 2208 over the digital control bus and produce the drive currents supplied to the LEDs within the emitter modules 2212 .
- FIG. 23 illustrates exemplary circuitry that may be included within interface circuitry 2210 and emitter modules 2212 .
- Interface circuitry 2210 comprises control logic 2302 , LED drivers 2304 , and receiver 2306 .
- Emitter module 2212 comprises emission LEDs 2308 and a detector 2310 .
- Control logic 2302 may comprise a microcontroller or special logic, and communicates with controller 2208 over the digital control bus.
- Control logic 2302 also sets the drive current produced by LED drivers 2304 to adjust the color and/or intensity of the light produced by emission LEDs 2308 , and manages receiver 2306 to monitor the light produced by each individual LED 2308 via detector 2310 .
- control logic 2302 may comprise memory for storing calibration information necessary for maintaining precise color, or alternatively, such information could be stored in controller 2208 .
- other information used in performing the methods described herein is in some embodiments stored in memory locations within control logic 2302 , within controller 2208 , or distributed between both of these circuits. Such other information may include configuration information such as that discussed in connection with FIG. 17 above.
- the circuit components on power supply board 2202 are implemented in a similar manner as the power supply and control circuitry shown in FIG. 20 , including AC/DC converter 2010 , DC/DC converter 2015 , PLL 2020 , wireless interface 2025 , and control circuit 2035 .
- interface circuit 2210 is in some embodiments implemented in a manner similar to driver and receiver circuit 2040 shown in FIGS. 20-21 .
- LEDs 2308 and detector 2310 are in some embodiments implemented using LED chains 2045 and detectors 2050 of FIG. 20 , respectively. Functions of control circuit 2035 in FIG. 20 may in some embodiments be distributed between control logic 2302 of FIG. 23 and controller 2208 of FIG. 22 .
- control circuit 2035 may be duplicated in both controller 2208 and control logic 2302 .
- Controller 2208 may also be referred to as a device control circuit herein.
- the device control circuit is configured to control the entire illumination device.
- Control logic 2302 may also be referred to herein as a module control circuit for its respective emitter module 2212 .
- the module control circuit is configured to control functionality of its respective emitter module, including performance of compensation measurements and adjustment of illumination settings. Certain functions of the module control circuits may in some embodiments be performed by the device control circuit 2208 .
- FIGS. 22-23 One implementation of an improved illumination device has now been described in reference to FIGS. 22-23 . Further description of such an illumination device may be found in commonly assigned U.S. application Ser. Nos. 13/970,944; 13/970,964; 13/970,990; and 14/097,339. A skilled artisan would understand how the illumination device could be alternatively implemented within the scope of the methods and devices described herein.
Landscapes
- Circuit Arrangement For Electric Light Sources In General (AREA)
Abstract
A method and illumination device are provided for interference-resistant compensation in light emitting diode (LED) illumination devices. In one embodiment, the method includes bringing to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive current of all except one of multiple emission LED elements for the duration of a first measurement interval and a later-occurring second measurement interval. The first and second measurement intervals are within respective first and second series of measurement intervals interspersed with periods of illumination, and the first and second series of measurement intervals are separated by respective first and second offsets from a timing reference. An embodiment of an illumination device includes multiple emission LED elements, one or more photodetectors, and a lamp control circuit, where the lamp control circuit is adapted to perform steps of the method.
Description
The present application is a reissue of U.S. Pat. No. 9,345,097, issued on May 17, 2016 from U.S. application Ser. No. 14/510,266, filed Oct. 9, 2014, which is a continuation-in-part of the following: U.S. application Ser. No. 13/970,990 filed Aug. 20, 2013; U.S. application Ser. No. 14/097,339 filed Dec. 5, 2013; and U.S. application Ser. No. 14/314,530 filed Jun. 25, 2014; each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety and for all purposes as if completely and fully set forth herein.
1. Field of the Invention
This invention relates to illumination devices and, more particularly, to illumination devices comprising a plurality of light emitting diode (LED) elements and to interference-resistant methods for monitoring and adjusting the illumination devices during operation.
2. Description of the Relevant Art
The following descriptions and examples are provided as background only and are intended to reveal information that is believed to be of possible relevance to the present invention. No admission is necessarily intended, or should be construed, that any of the following information constitutes prior art impacting the patentable character of the subjected mater claimed herein.
Lamps and displays using LEDs (light emitting diodes) for illumination are becoming increasingly popular in many different markets. LEDs provide a number of advantages over traditional light sources such as incandescent and fluorescent light bulbs, including low power consumption, long lifetime, lack of hazardous materials, and additional specific advantages for different applications. When used for general illumination, LEDs provide the opportunity to adjust the color (e.g., from white, to blue, to green, etc.) or the color temperature (e.g., from “warm white” to “cool white”) to produce different lighting effects. In addition, LEDs are rapidly replacing the Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamps (CCFL) conventionally used in many display applications (such as LCD backlights), due to the smaller form factor and wider color gamut provided by LEDs. Organic LEDs (OLEDs), which use arrays of multi-colored organic LEDs to produce light for each display pixel, are also becoming popular for many types of display devices.
LED devices may combine different colors of LEDs within the same package to produce a multi-colored LED device, or lamp. An example of a multi-colored LED device is one in which two or more different colors of LEDs are combined to produce white or near-white light. There are many different types of white light lamps on the market, some of which combine red, green and blue (RGB) LEDs, red, green, blue and yellow (RGBY) LEDs, white and red (WR) LEDs, RGBW LEDs, etc. By combining different colors of LEDs within the same package, and driving the differently colored LEDs with different drive currents, these lamps may be configured to generate white light or near-white light within a wide gamut of color points or color temperatures ranging from “warm white” (e.g., roughly 2600K-3700K), to “neutral white” (e.g., 3700K-5000K) to “cool white” (e.g., 5000K-8300K).
Although LEDs have many advantages over conventional light sources, a disadvantage of LEDs is that their output characteristics tend to vary over temperature, process and time. For example, it is generally known that the luminous flux, or the perceived power of light emitted by an LED, is directly proportional to the drive current supplied thereto. In many cases, the luminous flux of an LED is controlled by increasing/decreasing the drive current supplied to the LED to correspondingly increase/decrease the luminous flux. However, the luminous flux generated by an LED for a given drive current does not remain constant over temperature and time, and gradually decreases with increasing temperature and as the LED ages over time. Furthermore, the luminous flux tends to vary from batch to batch, and even from one LED to another in the same batch, due to process variations.
LED manufacturers try to compensate for process variations by sorting or binning the LEDs based on factory measured characteristics, such as chromaticity (or color), luminous flux and forward voltage. However, binning alone cannot compensate for changes in LED output characteristics due to aging and temperature fluctuations during use of the LED device. In order to maintain a constant (or desired) luminous flux, it is usually necessary to adjust the drive current supplied to the LED to account for temperature variations and aging effects.
As discussed further below, such adjustment may involve compensation measurements of one or more LED elements within a lamp. Interference from a nearby lamp can cause errors in such measurements for a given lamp, potentially resulting in incorrect compensation for the lamp. It would therefore be desirable to develop interference-resistant compensation methods for LED illumination devices, and illumination devices incorporating such methods.
The following description of various embodiments of an illumination device and a method for controlling an illumination device is not to be construed in any way as limiting the subject matter of the appended claims.
A method is provided herein for controlling an illumination device comprising multiple emission light emitting diodes (LED) elements. An “LED element” as used herein refers to either a single LED or a chain of serially connected LEDs supplied with the same drive current. An “emission LED element” as used herein is an LED element configured for light emission, as opposed to, for example, an LED configured as a light detector. An embodiment of the method includes operating one or more of the multiple emission LED elements at a respective substantially continuous drive current sufficient to produce illumination, bringing to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive current of all except one of the emission LED elements within the illumination device for the duration of a first measurement interval, and bringing to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive current of all except one of the emission LED elements for the duration of a second measurement interval subsequent to the first measurement interval. The first measurement interval is one of a first series of measurement intervals interspersed with periods of operating the emission LED elements to produce illumination, and the second measurement interval is one of a second series of measurement intervals interspersed with periods of operating the emission LED elements to produce illumination. The first series of measurement intervals and second series of measurement intervals are separated by respective first and second offsets from a timing reference. In an embodiment, the method further includes discontinuing use of the first series of measurement intervals at a time subsequent to the end of the first measurement interval.
The method may further include applying a drive current sufficient to produce illumination to one of the emission LED elements during each of the first and second measurement intervals, and monitoring a measurement photocurrent induced in a measurement photodetector within the lamp while the drive current is applied. In an embodiment, the method also includes determining that a result of monitoring the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of an expected range. In an embodiment, this determining includes comparing the result to a previously stored result. In another embodiment, bringing to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive current of all except one of the emission LED elements for the duration of the second measurement interval is in response to the determination that the result of monitoring the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of the expected range. In another embodiment the method also includes, in response to the determination that the result of monitoring the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of the expected range, repeating, during an additional one of the first series of measurement intervals, applying the drive current sufficient to produce illumination to the one of the emission LED elements and said monitoring the measurement photocurrent induced in the measurement photodetector. The method may further include determining whether a predetermined number of out-of-range measurements using the first series of measurement intervals has occurred. In such an embodiment, bringing to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive current of all except one of the emission LED elements for the duration of a second measurement interval may be in response to a determination that the predetermined number of out-of-range measurements using the first series of measurement intervals has occurred.
In a further embodiment, the method includes, for each of the first and second measurement intervals, bringing the drive current applied to the one of the emission LED elements to a level insufficient to produce illumination for a portion of the measurement interval, such that the respective drive currents of all of the emission LED elements within the illumination device are at a level insufficient to produce illumination for the portion of the measurement interval. The method may further include monitoring a background photocurrent induced in the measurement photodetector during the portion of the measurement interval with the drive currents of all of the emission LED elements at a level insufficient to produce illumination, and subtracting the background photocurrent from the measurement photocurrent. In an embodiment, the result of monitoring a measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval includes a result of subtracting the background photocurrent from the measurement photocurrent for the first measurement interval.
In addition to the method embodiments described above, an illumination device is contemplated herein. In one embodiment, the device includes multiple emission LED elements, one or more photodetectors, and a control circuit operably coupled to the multiple emission LED elements and the one or more photodetectors. In an embodiment, the control circuit is adapted to operate one or more of the multiple emission LED elements at a respective substantially continuous drive current to produce illumination, bring to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive current of all except one of the emission LED elements within the illumination device for the duration of a first measurement interval, and bring to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive currents of all except one of the emission LED elements for the duration of a second measurement interval subsequent to the first measurement interval. The first measurement interval is one of a first series of measurement intervals interspersed with periods of operating the emission LED elements to produce illumination, and the second measurement interval is one of a second series of measurement intervals interspersed with periods of operating the emission LED elements to produce illumination. The first series of measurement intervals and second series of measurement intervals are separated by respective first and second offsets from a timing reference.
In a further embodiment, the illumination device also includes a timing reference generator operatively coupled to the control circuit and adapted to generate a periodic timing reference. In such an embodiment, the control circuit may be further adapted to generate the first series of measurement intervals synchronized to the timing reference with a first offset from the timing reference and generate the second series of measurement intervals synchronized to the timing reference with a second offset from the timing reference. In another embodiment, the control circuit is adapted to discontinue use of the first series of measurement intervals at a time subsequent to the end of the first measurement interval.
In another embodiment, the illumination device also includes an LED driver and receiver circuit operably coupled to the multiple emission LED elements, the one or more photodetectors, and the control circuit. In such an embodiment, the control circuit is adapted to use the LED driver and receiver circuit to adjust the respective drive currents of the emission LED elements. In a further embodiment, the control circuit is adapted to use the LED driver and receiver circuit to, during each of said first measurement interval and said second measurement interval, bring to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive currents of all except one of the emission LED elements, apply a drive current sufficient to produce illumination to the one of the emission LED elements, and monitor a measurement photocurrent induced in the measurement photodetector while the drive current is applied. In a still further embodiment, the control circuit is further adapted to determine whether a result of monitoring the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of an expected range. The control circuit may also be adapted to bring to a level insufficient to produce illumination the respective drive currents of all except one of the emission LED elements for the duration of the second measurement interval in response to a determination that the result is outside of the expected range. In an embodiment, the illumination device also includes a storage medium operably coupled to the control circuit, and the control circuit is adapted to compare the result of monitoring the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval with a result previously stored in the storage medium. In another embodiment, the control circuit is further adapted to determine whether a predetermined number of out-of-range measurements using the first series of measurement intervals has occurred.
In a further embodiment of the illumination device contemplated herein, the control circuit is further adapted to, for each of the first and second measurement intervals, bring the drive current applied to the one of the emission LED elements to a level insufficient to produce illumination for a portion of the measurement interval, such that the respective drive currents of all of the emission LED elements within the illumination device are at a level insufficient to produce illumination for the portion of the measurement interval. In such an embodiment, the control circuit may further be adapted to monitor a background photocurrent induced in the measurement photodetector during the portion of the measurement interval and subtract the background photocurrent from the measurement photocurrent. In a still further embodiment, the control circuit is further adapted to determine whether a result of subtracting the background photocurrent from the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of an expected range.
Other objects and advantages of the invention will become apparent upon reading the following detailed description and upon reference to the accompanying drawings.
While the invention is susceptible to various modifications and alternative forms, specific embodiments thereof are shown by way of example in the drawings and will herein be described in detail. It should be understood, however, that the drawings and detailed description thereto are not intended to limit the invention to the particular form disclosed, but on the contrary, the intention is to cover all modifications, equivalents and alternatives falling within the spirit and scope of the present invention as defined by the appended claims.
An LED generally comprises a chip of semiconducting material doped with impurities to create a p-n junction. As in other diodes, current flows easily from the p-side, or anode, to the n-side, or cathode, but not in the reverse direction. Charge-carriers—electrons and holes—flow into the junction from electrodes with different voltages. When an electron meets a hole, it falls into a lower energy level, and releases energy in the form of a photon (i.e., light). The wavelength of the light emitted by the LED, and thus its color, depends on the band gap energy of the materials forming the p-n junction of the LED.
Red and yellow LEDs are commonly composed of materials (e.g., AlInGaP) having a relatively low band gap energy, and thus produce longer wavelengths of light. For example, most red and yellow LEDs have a peak wavelength in the range of approximately 610-650 nm and approximately 580-600 nm, respectively. On the other hand, green and blue LEDs are commonly composed of materials (e.g., GaN or InGaN) having a larger band gap energy, and thus, produce shorter wavelengths of light. For example, most green and blue LEDs have a peak wavelength in the range of approximately 515-550 nm and approximately 450-490 nm, respectively.
In some cases, a “white” LED may be formed by covering or coating, e.g., a violet or blue LED having a peak emission wavelength of about 400-490 nm with a phosphor (e.g., YAG), which down-converts the photons emitted by the blue LED to a lower energy level, or a longer peak emission wavelength, such as about 525 nm to about 600 nm. In some cases, such an LED may be configured to produce substantially white light having a correlated color temperature (CCT) of about 3000K. However, a skilled artisan would understand how different colors of LEDs and/or different phosphors may be used to produce a “white” LED with a potentially different CCT.
When two or more differently colored LEDs are combined within a single package, the spectral content of the individual LEDs is combined to produce blended light. In some cases, differently colored LEDs may be combined to produce white or near-white light within a wide gamut of color points or CCTs ranging from “warm white” (e.g., roughly 2600K-3000K), to “neutral white” (e.g., 3000K-4000K) to “cool white” (e.g., 4000K-8300K). Examples of white light illumination devices include, but are not limited to, those that combine red, green and blue (RGB) LEDs, red, green, blue and yellow (RGBY) LEDs, white and red (WR) LEDs, and RGBW LEDs.
The illumination devices disclosed herein may in certain embodiments include one or more emitter modules, which may also be called lamps. An emitter module has a plurality of LED elements and one or more photodetectors combined into a package. As noted above, an LED element may be either a single LED or a chain of serially connected LEDs supplied with the same drive current. An LED element configured for its junction(s) to have sufficient forward bias for light emission may be referred to herein as an “emission LED element.” An LED may also be configured as a photodetector, typically by applying zero bias or reverse bias to the LED junction and collecting photocurrent induced by incident light. In an embodiment, multiple LEDs configured as photodetectors may be connected in parallel so that their photocurrents can be combined.
Although not limited to such, the present invention is particularly well suited to multi-colored illumination devices in which two or more different colors of LEDs are combined to produce blended white or near-white light, since the output characteristics of differently colored LEDs vary differently over drive current, temperature and time. The present invention is also particularly well suited to illumination devices (i.e., tunable illumination devices) that enable the target dimming level and/or the target chromaticity setting to be changed by adjusting the drive currents supplied to one or more of the LEDs, since changes in drive current inherently affect the lumen output, color and temperature of the illumination device. These tunable illumination devices should all produce the same color and color rendering index (CRI) when set to a particular dimming level and chromaticity setting (or color set point) on a standardized chromaticity diagram.
A chromaticity diagram maps the gamut of colors the human eye can perceive in terms of chromaticity coordinates and spectral wavelengths. An example of a chromaticity diagram is shown in FIG. 1 . The spectral wavelengths of all saturated colors are distributed around the edge of an outlined space (called the “gamut” of human vision), which encompasses all of the hues perceived by the human eye. The curved edge of the gamut is called the spectral locus and corresponds to monochromatic light, with each point representing a pure hue of a single wavelength. The straight edge on the lower part of the gamut is called the line of purples. These colors, although they are on the border of the gamut, have no counterpart in monochromatic light. Less saturated colors appear in the interior of the figure, with white and near-white colors near the center.
In the 1931 Commission Internationale de l'Êclairage (CIE) Chromaticity Diagram of FIG. 1 , colors within the gamut of human vision are mapped in terms of chromaticity coordinates (x, y). The diagram of FIG. 1 is only one illustrative example of how perceived colors may be represented using a two-dimensional space, and other “color spaces,” with corresponding chromaticity values, may also be used. Some exemplary color spaces include the CIE 1931 XYZ color space, the CIE 1931 RGB color space, the CIE 1976 LUV color space, and various other RGB color spaces (e.g., sRGB, Adobe RGB, etc.). Wavelength in nanometers (nm) of the corresponding monochromatic light is indicated along the curved edge of the gamut in FIG. 1 . The dominant wavelength, as perceived by the eye, of a point within the gamut may be found using a line including the point and a reference point for the illumination source, such as point C of FIG. 1 corresponding to the CIE-C reference. The dominant wavelength under the reference illumination is read at the intersection of the line with the curved edge of the gamut. For example, a red (R) LED with a dominant wavelength of about 640 nm may have a chromaticity coordinate of (0.68, 0.28), a green (G) LED with a dominant wavelength of about 525 nm may have a chromaticity coordinate of (0.17, 0.72), and a blue (B) LED with a dominant wavelength of 465 nm may have a chromaticity coordinate of (0.16, 0.11). This dominant wavelength perceived by the eye does not necessarily correspond to the peak wavelength, or wavelength of highest intensity, emitted from an LED.
The color of an incandescent black body as a function of temperature in Kelvin is also plotted on the diagram of FIG. 1 , in a curve known as the blackbody locus. The chromaticity coordinates (i.e., color points) that lie along the blackbody locus obey Planck's equation, E(λ)=Aλ−5/(e(B/T)−1). Color points that lie on or near the blackbody locus provide a range of white or near-white light with color temperatures ranging between approximately 2500K and 10,000K. These color points are typically achieved by mixing light from two or more differently colored LEDs. For example, light emitted from the RGB LEDs plotted in FIG. 1 may be mixed to produce a substantially white light with a color temperature in the range of about 2500K to about 5000K.
Although an illumination device is typically configured to produce a range of white or near-white color temperatures arranged along the blackbody curve (e.g., about 2500K to 5000K), some illumination devices may be configured to produce any color within the color gamut, such as triangular color gamut 18 of FIG. 1 , formed by the individual LEDs (e.g., RGB). The chromaticity coordinates of the combined light, e.g., (0.437, 0.404) for 3000K white light, define the target chromaticity or color set point at which the device is intended to operate. In some devices, the target chromaticity or color set point may be changed by altering the ratio of drive currents supplied to the individual LEDs.
In general, the target chromaticity of the illumination device may be changed by adjusting the drive current levels (in current dimming) or duty cycle (in PWM dimming) supplied to one or more of the emission LEDs. For example, an illumination device comprising RGB LEDs may be configured to produce “warmer” white light by increasing the drive current supplied to the red LEDs and decreasing the drive currents supplied to the blue and/or green LEDs. Since adjusting the drive currents also affects the lumen output and temperature of the illumination device, the target chromaticity must be carefully calibrated and controlled to ensure that the actual chromaticity equals the target value.
U.S. application Ser. Nos. 13/970,990 and 14/314,530, co-pending with the present application and commonly owned and/or subject to assignment with the present application, describe methods of compensation for variation in quantities including temperature and drive current, and illumination devices employing such methods. Approaches described in these applications to compensating for variations in luminous flux from LEDs, such as the effects illustrated by FIGS. 2-5 , in some embodiments include the use of calibration tables created for the LEDs within an illumination device. Such calibration tables store results of calibration measurements previously made using the LEDs. In an embodiment, a calibration table stores values of photocurrent induced on a photodetector within the illumination device when a drive current is applied to each LED within the device separately. Such a calibration table may in some embodiments store photocurrent values obtained when applying multiple different drive current levels to an LED. In some embodiments in which photocurrent values are obtained when applying different drive current levels, forward voltage measurements are obtained for each LED after each drive current is applied. Such forward voltage measurements can be used as an indication of junction temperature in the LED. The calibration table may in further embodiments store photocurrent values obtained at different values of ambient temperature. Other types of data and variations of the above-described data may also be included in a calibration table, as described in more detail in co-pending application Ser. Nos. 13/970,990 and 14/314,530. In general, the data stored in a calibration table is in some embodiments used for comparison to measurements made during operation of the illumination device. Such comparison can be used to indicate whether properties of one or more of the LEDs within the device have changed, and whether the corresponding drive current of the LED should be adjusted.
Exemplary compensation approaches for an illumination device including multiple emission LED elements and at least one photodetector are illustrated by FIGS. 6-8 . FIG. 6 is an exemplary timing diagram illustrating substantially continuous operation of one or more of the LED elements to produce illumination. As used herein, the term “substantially continuously” means that an operative drive current (denoted generically as I1 in FIG. 6 ) is supplied to the emission LED elements almost continuously, with the exception of intervals in which all of the emission LED elements are momentarily turned “off” for short durations of time 610. As used herein, “off” in connection with an LED element refers to the LED element having a drive current reduced to a non-operative level, such that the LED element does not produce illumination that is generally detectable by the detectors used in the illumination device or in nearby devices. In an embodiment, drive current I1 represents a combination of different drive currents applied as appropriate to respective different LED elements within the illumination device, to produce the desired illumination. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 6 , the intervals are utilized for obtaining forward voltage measurements from each of four emission LED elements (Vfe), one LED element at a time, by supplying a relatively small drive current to each LED and measuring the forward voltage developed thereacross. The intervals may also be used for other types of measurements, as shown in FIGS. 8-9 and discussed in more detail below. In certain embodiments discussed further below, all LED elements within the illumination device remain off throughout some of the intervals to allow detection to determine whether measurements are being conducted by a different illumination device.
In the embodiment of FIG. 6 , the illumination device includes at least four emission LED elements. In an embodiment, the device includes exactly four emission LED elements, and the forward voltage across each element is measured, one at a time during successive respective measurement intervals. Unless specified otherwise, a measurement performed “during” an interval as used herein is performed within the interval, but not necessarily for the entirety of the interval. In such an embodiment the four emission LED elements may be of different colors to form a multi-color lamp. In some embodiments the multicolor lamp may be configured to produce white light, as described above. During illumination periods 620, one or more of the LED elements are driven with respective DC drive currents to produce illumination. In an embodiment, all of the LED elements in the lamp are driven during illumination periods 620. In other embodiments, depending on the color, intensity, and/or pattern of light desired, fewer than all of the LED elements may be driven during the illumination periods. With the exception of the LED under test, all emission LED elements within the device are turned off throughout intervals 610, however, with their respective drive currents removed or at least reduced to non-operative levels (denoted as I0 in FIG. 6 ). In an embodiment, intervals 610 are part of a periodic series having a specific offset (which may be zero) from a periodic timing reference.
The plot in FIG. 7 of luminous flux vs. LED drive current illustrates an exemplary technique of using calibration values to determine the drive current (Ix) needed to achieve a desired luminous flux (Lx) from an emission LED element at its present operating temperature (reflected in the present value of Vfe, Vfe_present, for the LED element measured during one of intervals 610 of FIG. 6 ). Data points 710, denoted by filled circles, represent luminous flux values from a calibration table, obtained during calibration of the LED element using three different drive currents (10%, 30% and 100% of the maximum drive current, in the embodiment of FIG. 7 ) and two different ambient temperatures T0 and T1. Each of data points 710 may be associated with a respective forward voltage value Vfe in the calibration table, obtained just before or just after the respective luminous flux measurement at the respective drive current and ambient temperature value. Comparison of these forward voltages in the calibration table for a given LED element to a forward voltage measured during operation can allow the present temperature T_present to be estimated. In an embodiment, interpolation between the calibration values 710 is used to predict luminous flux values 720, denoted by unfilled triangles, corresponding to the calibration drive currents at the current operating temperature (T_present). In a further embodiment, an interpolation or curve-fitting using predicted values 720 is used to generate a relationship, plotted as curve 730, for luminous flux vs. drive current at the present operating temperature. The drive current Ix needed to produce the desired luminous flux Lx can then be obtained from the generated relationship. As described further in the above-referenced co-pending applications, the specific interpolation techniques used may depend on the characteristics of the LED element being compensated, along with considerations such as memory and processing capability. The approach illustrated in FIGS. 6 and 7 is employed in embodiments of methods for maintaining a target luminous flux from an LED element in spite of changes in the LED element's temperature.
Another example of a compensation method is illustrated by FIGS. 8 and 9 . The timing diagram of FIG. 8 is similar to that of FIG. 6 , with operative drive current I1 supplied to one or more of the emission LED elements within an illumination device almost continuously, with the exception of intervals during which all of the emission LED elements, except for the emission LED under test, are momentarily turned off for short durations of time 810. In the embodiment of FIG. 8 , the first four of intervals 810 are used for measuring a photocurrent (Iph) induced on a photodetector within the illumination device, in response to illumination that is produced by each emission LED element, one LED element at a time. During each photocurrent measurement, the emission LED under test is driven with an operative drive current level. In an embodiment, such photocurrent measurements allow detection of changes in the luminous flux produced by an LED element at a given drive current, as may occur in LEDs over time.
The plot in FIG. 9 of photocurrent induced on a detector as a function of LED drive current illustrates an exemplary technique of using calibration values to determine the expected photocurrent (Iph_exp) induced by a particular drive current (Ix) applied to an emission LED element at the present detector temperature (reflected in the present value of the forward voltage measured across the detector, Vfd_present, during one of intervals 810 of FIG. 8 ). Data points 910, denoted by filled circles, represent photocurrent values from a calibration table, obtained during calibration of an LED element using three different drive currents (10%, 30% and 100% of the maximum drive current, in the embodiment of FIG. 9 ) and two different ambient temperatures (corresponding to Vfd0 and Vfd1 measured at ambient temperatures T0 and T1). In an embodiment, interpolation between the calibration values is used to predict expected photocurrent values 920, denoted by unfilled triangles, corresponding to the calibration drive currents at the current detector temperature (Vfd_present). In a further embodiment, an interpolation or curve-fitting using predicted values 920 is used to generate a relationship, plotted as curve 930, for expected photocurrent vs. drive current at the present detector temperature. The expected photocurrent induced on the detector by an LED operated at the present value of drive current (for example, a drive current obtained using the method illustrated in FIGS. 6 and 7 ) can then be obtained from the generated relationship. This expected value can then be compared to the corresponding presently measured photocurrent obtained during one of intervals 810 shown in FIG. 8 . In an embodiment of a compensation method, a difference between the measured and expected values indicates a change in the light intensity generated by the LED element over time. Such an “aging” effect may be compensated for by adjusting the drive current applied to the LED element, as described in co-pending application Ser. No. 14/314,530.
As shown by the examples above and described further in the co-pending applications referenced herein, it can be advantageous to take measurements during brief interruptions in illumination by an LED illumination device. When used in conjunction with calibration data, such measurements allow monitoring and correction of variations from desired settings. In one embodiment, a series of intervals such as intervals 610 of FIG. 6 may extend for the entire time that an illumination device is operating. In such an embodiment, a sequence of compensation measurements may be repeated continuously, one measurement per interval, while the illumination device is operating.
In an alternative embodiment, compensation using intervals such as intervals 610 of FIG. 6 is performed only at certain times during operation of an illumination device. For example, compensation may be performed when a significant change in ambient temperature has been detected, or when there has been a change in settings for the illumination device. Timing diagrams illustrating performance of compensation at selected times are shown in FIG. 10 . The upper diagram of FIG. 10 illustrates periods 1010 of continuous illumination produced by application of an operative drive current designated I1 to one or more LED elements. In an embodiment, drive current I1 represents a combination of different drive currents applied to respective different LED elements within the illumination device, to produce the desired illumination. In the embodiment of FIG. 10 , illumination periods 1010 are occasionally interrupted by compensation periods 1020, during which measurements are taken as part of a compensation method. In an embodiment, initiation of a compensation period 1020 is in response to a determination that there has been a change in some quantity such as ambient temperature or illumination settings for the device. In such an embodiment, compensation periods may be repeated until a changing quantity has stabilized. In an alternative embodiment, compensation periods 1020 may be initiated at previously specified times or for a fixed number of times, including one time.
The lower diagram of FIG. 10 is an expanded timing diagram of an exemplary compensation period 1020. Intervals 1022 are similar to intervals 610 of FIG. 6 or intervals 810 of FIG. 8 . Within intervals 1022, all emission LED elements are turned off except for a single LED element that may be turned on as part of a particular measurement. Between intervals 1022, one or more of the LED elements within the lamp are supplied with an operative drive current during illumination periods 1024. In the embodiment of FIG. 10 , the drive current applied during illumination periods 1024 is “boosted” to an increased level designated generically as I2. In an embodiment, drive current level I2 represents a combination of different drive currents applied to respective different LED elements, each at a higher level than is applied to the LED element in connection with drive current level I1 during illumination periods 1010. As discussed in more detail in co-pending application Ser. No. 13/970,990, use of a boosted drive current during compensation periods may counteract a “flicker” effect that can result from the interruptions in illumination occurring during a compensation period such as period 1020.
As discussed above in connection with FIGS. 8-9 , in some embodiments compensation methods for an LED illumination device such as an emitter module rely upon measurements of photocurrent induced in a photodetector when a drive current is applied to an LED element. In such an embodiment, it is critical that the photocurrent induced reflect the LED element being measured rather than interference from other light sources. In some embodiments of methods disclosed herein, subtraction of ambient-induced photocurrent is employed to mitigate the effects of interference. An embodiment for which interference-related illumination can be effectively subtracted is illustrated in FIG. 11A .
The upper diagram of FIG. 11A plots luminous flux vs. time during an interval 1102 similar to, for example, interval 1022 of FIG. 10 . In the embodiment of FIG. 11A , a first portion 1104 of the interval is a measurement portion of the interval during which a particular emission LED element may be turned on (while all other emission LED elements in the illumination device are turned off). Second portion 1106 in this embodiment is a portion of the interval used for ambient detection, during which all emission LED elements within the illumination device are turned off Although portions 1104 and 1106 each have a duration of approximately one-half of interval 1102, the portions could have different relative durations in other embodiments. Waveform 1110, denoted with a solid line, represents the luminous flux resulting from turning on an LED element during interval portion 1104 for a measurement, then turning the LED element off during interval portion 1106. Waveform 1112, denoted with a dashed line, represents the luminous flux resulting from ambient light that is constant in intensity for at least the duration of interval 1102.
The lower diagram of FIG. 11A plots photocurrent induced in a photodetector in response to the luminous flux plotted in the upper diagram. For purposes of illustration, it is assumed that the photodetector has equal sensitivity to the LED illumination represented by waveform 1110 and the ambient illumination represented by waveform 1112. Waveform 1114, denoted with a solid line, represents the total photocurrent induced by the LED and ambient illumination, or the sum of the photocurrent induced by each type of illumination. Waveform 1116, denoted by a dashed line, represents the difference between the total photocurrent at any time and an ambient current value IA, where IA is the total current measured at a point during portion 1106 of interval 1102. For example, IA corresponds to the total photocurrent at time TA. In other embodiments, IA can be obtained by averaging multiple measurements taken during interval portion 1106, or by using other signal processing techniques known to one of ordinary skill in the art in view of this disclosure. Similarly, total photocurrent IT is obtained by one or more measurements of photocurrent in the detector during interval portion 1104, accompanied by averaging and/or other signal processing as understood by one of ordinary skill in the art in view of this disclosure. Subtraction of ambient photocurrent IA from total photocurrent IT results in corrected photocurrent IC attributable to the LED illumination corresponding to waveform 1110.
In an embodiment, the detector used to measure induced ambient photocurrent IA is the same detector used to measure total photocurrent IT during interval portion 1104 when the target LED element is driven at an operative current level. In this way, the ambient photocurrent induced during measurement of the tested LED element may be most accurately accounted for by the ambient photocurrent detected during interval portion 1106 when the tested LED element is off. In some embodiments, a separate detector may be used for ambient light detection, alternatively or in addition to a detector used for ambient detection during photocurrent measurements. A separate detector for ambient light measurement may be particularly useful, for example, in embodiments for which target settings of the illumination device are adjusted depending on ambient light conditions.
The importance of the ambient subtraction of FIG. 11A can be appreciated by reference back to the method illustrated by FIGS. 8-9 . As described above, FIG. 9 illustrates determination of an expected photocurrent value by interpolation from stored calibration values. The expected value is compared to the photocurrent measured for the corresponding LED element—for example, Iph1 of FIG. 8 . If the measured photocurrent includes photocurrent induced by illumination other than that from the LED element, such as total current IT of FIG. 11A , comparison to the expected photocurrent determined as shown in FIG. 9 will provide an inaccurate indication of how illumination from the LED element has changed. The resulting scaling and adjustment of drive current to the LED element may therefore move the LED element away from its target settings rather than helping to maintain them. Comparison of the expected photocurrent to corrected photocurrent IC in the embodiment of FIG. 11A , however, should provide an accurate indication of how the illumination from the LED element may have changed.
A situation in which the subtraction technique illustrated in FIG. 11A is not effective in mitigating interference is illustrated by FIG. 11B . The upper diagram of FIG. 11B is a plot of luminous flux during the same interval 1102 having first and second portions 1104 and 1106, respectively, as that shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11A . The upper diagram also includes waveform 1110 as also shown in FIG. 11A , representing luminous flux from an LED element turned on during interval portion 1104. Instead of the constant ambient illumination 1112 shown in FIG. 11A , however, the upper diagram of FIG. 11B includes waveform 1120 representing an additional illumination source that is on during interval portion 1104 and off during interval portion 1106. In an embodiment, waveform 1120 represents illumination from an additional LED element within a separate illumination device or emitter module than that of the LED element represented by waveform 1110.
The lower diagram of FIG. 11B plots photocurrent induced in a photodetector in response to the luminous flux plotted in the upper diagram, assuming equal sensitivity of the photodetector to the LED illumination represented by waveforms 1110 and 1120. Like waveform 1114 of FIG. 11A , waveform 1122 in FIG. 11B represents the total photocurrent induced by the illumination sources corresponding to waveforms 110 and 1120. In the embodiment of FIG. 11B , the difference between the total photocurrent and current IA measured at a point during portion 1106 of interval 1102 is also represented by waveform 1122, because IA is zero in FIG. 11B . Using IA, IT and IC defined in the same manner as for FIG. 11A , IC is equal to IT in the embodiment of FIG. 11B because IA is zero. Therefore, IC in FIG. 11B does not represent the photocurrent induced solely by illumination from the LED element corresponding to waveform 1110. Use of the photocurrent from FIG. 11B in a compensation method such as that illustrated in FIGS. 8 and 9 would lead to serious errors since a photocurrent not corresponding to a given LED element would be used for determining the adjustment to the drive current of that LED element.
In the example of FIG. 11B , an extreme case is illustrated of an interfering light source that is turned on and off at exactly the same times as the LED element being compensated. It is noted that any interference source not having constant intensity over interval 1102 can produce an error in measured photocurrent, even if the interference source does not turn on and off at exactly the same times as the target LED element. If the “ambient” photocurrent measured during interval portion 1106 is not equal to the interference-generated portion of the photocurrent measured during interval portion 1104, ambient subtraction will not be effective in extracting the photocurrent corresponding to the LED element being compensated. An embodiment including a non-constant interference source as shown in FIG. 11B may of course include constant ambient illumination as well, in the manner shown in FIG. 11A . In such an embodiment, the photocurrent associated with the constant illumination could be subtracted out, while the non-constant interfering illumination would lead to compensation errors.
“Non-constant illumination” as used herein refers to illumination having a substantial variation with time during a measurement interval, or during a portion of a measurement interval in which detection of background or ambient illumination is being performed. In an embodiment, a substantial variation is a variation that would result in a significant error for a photocurrent measurement conducted during the same interval. The size of the variation that would result in a significant error depends on the relative magnitudes of photocurrents induced by a measured LED element and by the external illumination in the photodetector used for the photocurrent measurement.
A further illustration of how the kind of interference shown in FIG. 11B can arise is given by FIG. 12 . Two timing diagrams are shown in FIG. 12 . The upper diagram, designated Lamp A, is associated with a first emitter module including multiple LED elements and a photodetector. The lower diagram, designated Lamp B, corresponds to a second emitter module. The two lamps may in some embodiments be part of a single larger illumination device. In other embodiments, the two lamps may be in separate illumination devices that are installed in proximity to one another, or even facing one another. Each timing diagram corresponds to a portion of a compensation period such as period 1020 of FIG. 10 , in which periods of illumination 1202 are interrupted by intervals including intervals 1210, 1220, 1230 and 1240, during which the emission LED elements within the lamp are turned off and a measurement associated with a particular LED element and/or detector may be taken. In some embodiments, drive currents applied to LED elements during the illumination periods may be “boosted” as shown in FIG. 10 , to a higher level as compared to the level during longer illumination periods not interrupted by measurements, such as periods 1010 of FIG. 10 .
During interval 1210 of FIG. 12 , a forward voltage measurement (denoted as Vf1A) is taken of an emission LED element 1 within Lamp A. No measurements are taken for Lamp B during interval 1210; instead, drive currents are applied to one or more of the emission LED elements of Lamp B to produce the desired illumination. In other words, interval 1210 is an interval for Lamp A but not for Lamp B. Whether illumination from Lamp B interferes with the forward voltage measurement taken for Lamp A depends on the relative magnitudes of the bias-induced current in the LED element being measured and the photocurrent induced in the LED element by the external illumination. The magnitude of the photocurrent induced may depend on multiple factors, such as the relative locations of Lamp B and Lamp A, the relative wavelengths of the driven LED element in Lamp B and Lamp A, and the carrier recombination lifetimes under measurement conditions for the measured LED element in Lamp A. In an embodiment, the induced photocurrent from external radiation is on the order of a microampere or less, while the forward bias induced current in the measured element is on the order of a milliampere. In such an embodiment, illumination by Lamp B in interval 1210 of FIG. 12 would not have a significant effect on the forward voltage measurement taken by Lamp A. The forward voltage measurement in such an embodiment may be considered to not be sensitive to illumination from the other illumination device.
In an alternative embodiment in which Lamp A were taking a photocurrent measurement during interval 1210 rather than a forward voltage measurement, the magnitude of the externally-induced photocurrent may be significant by comparison to the measured current. However, the constant illumination provided by the illumination from Lamp B during interval 1210 could be successfully subtracted out if a photocurrent measurement were taken by Lamp A during that interval. This subtraction would correspond to the situation illustrated in FIG. 11A above.
During each of intervals 1220 and 1240, one of the lamps is performing a photocurrent measurement on an LED element, while the other lamp is performing a forward voltage measurement. During interval 1240, for example, a forward voltage measurement Vf2A of emission LED element 2 of Lamp A is performed, while a photocurrent measurement Iph2B measures the photocurrent induced in a detector of Lamp B by operation of emission LED element 2 of Lamp B. In an embodiment, forward voltage measurements of emission LED elements are taken using non-operative levels of drive current, meaning drive current levels insufficient to produce significant illumination from the LED. In such an embodiment, the forward voltage measurement taken using one lamp would not be expected to interfere with the photocurrent measurement taken using the other lamp. Whether there is interference in the opposite direction—i.e., whether the photocurrent measurement of Lamp B interferes with the forward voltage measurement of Lamp A—depends upon the relative magnitudes of the forward bias induced current in the measured LED element of Lamp A and the photocurrent induced in that LED element by the illumination from Lamp B. This can depend on various factors, as discussed above in the discussion of interval 1210.
During interval 1230, however, a photocurrent measurement is taken in both Lamp A and Lamp B. Because illumination is produced by both of these measurements, errors will be introduced into each measurement, and any resulting drive current adjustments, to the extent that illumination produced by one lamp is detectable by the other lamp. Interference from these two photocurrent measurements cannot be mitigated using ambient subtraction techniques. An attempt to subtract interference-related photocurrent from the photocurrent measured by each lamp would in one embodiment lead to a situation similar to that shown in FIG. 11B : each LED element would be turned on during one portion of interval 1230 and off during the other portion, causing the “corrected” photocurrent values to be too large. (Even in an embodiment for which one lamp turned its LED element on during a first portion of the interval and the other lamp turned its LED element on during a second portion, the ambient subtraction would still be incorrect: in this case the “ambient” subtracted would be too large and the resulting “corrected” photocurrent too small.) Another way of avoiding interference caused by two lamps taking measurements during the same interval is needed.
In an embodiment of a method described herein for avoiding interference, detection is performed during one or more intervals before a photocurrent measurement is performed during one of the intervals. In a further embodiment, the detection during one or more intervals is performed before any measurement associated with compensation of an illumination device is performed. Photocurrent measurements, or in some embodiments any measurements, are initiated after detection has been performed for enough intervals to indicate that interference from compensation measurements of another lamp is unlikely. In an embodiment, a photodetector is used to determine whether outside illumination is present that is not constant throughout the measurement interval.
In an embodiment, the number of intervals used for detection depends on the particular sequences of measurements used by the illumination device performing the method and by any potentially interfering devices. As noted above in the discussion of FIG. 12 , some types of measurement used for compensation of LED elements in an illumination device are more likely to interfere with other illumination devices than other types of measurement. In an embodiment, the specific measurements most likely to cause interference include measurements of photocurrent induced in a detector by an illuminated LED element. In such an embodiment, those are the measurements most likely to produce a non-constant illumination that could interfere with a photocurrent measurement by a different illumination device. In a typical embodiment, the measurements that are most likely to result in interference are also the measurements most likely to be detected by a different illumination device employing detection intervals before starting its own photocurrent measurements. The number of intervals used for detection may depend on how many total measurements are expected to be performed in a compensation measurement sequence, as well as how many of those measurements are expected to be of the kind most likely to cause interference.
As an example, consider an emitter module including 4 LED elements and at least one photodetector. The photodetector(s) may be dedicated photodetectors or may in some embodiments be emission LEDs configured at certain times as photodetectors. In an embodiment, such an emitter module may use a sequence of 12 measurements for compensation. For example, 4 of the compensation measurements could be forward voltage measurements for each of the 4 LED elements. Another 4 measurements could be photocurrent measurements for each of the 4 LED elements using one dedicated photodetector. Another 2 measurements could be photocurrent measurements for two of the LED elements using an additional photodetector. The remaining 2 measurements could be forward voltages across each of two detectors. In this example, 6 of the 12 compensation measurements are photocurrent measurements.
In one embodiment of the above example, it may be expected that any interfering illumination devices will also be configured to use a sequence of 12 compensation measurements, 6 of which are photocurrent measurements. If the particular sequence of measurements that an interfering device may be configured to use is not known, one approach would be to detect for 12 measurement intervals before starting compensation measurements. If no non-constant illumination is detected during any of the 12 intervals, it is likely that no nearby illumination device is performing compensation measurements. In another embodiment, if it is expected that 6 of the compensation measurements performed by an interfering device are photocurrent measurements, detection could be performed for 7 intervals before starting compensation measurements if no non-constant illumination is detected. If another device were performing compensation measurements including six photocurrent measurements, one of the 6 photocurrent measurements would be expected to occur within a sequence of 7 intervals. In still another embodiment, if the 6 photocurrent measurements were expected to be uniformly spaced within the 12-measurement sequence (in this case, every other measurement of the 12 measurements would be a photocurrent measurement), 2 consecutive intervals in which no non-constant illumination is detected may be sufficient to indicate that no nearby device is likely to be currently performing compensation measurements.
In a further embodiment of the emitter module example described above, the various photocurrent measurements included in the compensation measurement sequence are not equally detectable. Some of the photocurrent measurements may be easier to detect, and more likely to cause interference, than others. This may particularly be the case in embodiments with emitter modules containing emission LED elements emitting different colors of light. Certain combinations of LED element and detector may result in significantly higher photocurrent signals. Measurements using these emitter/detector combinations may be referred to as “beacon” measurements. The magnitude of the photocurrent signal for a particular measurement depends on factors including the luminous flux emitted by the LED element, the sensitivity of the detector, and how well the emitter and detector are matched in terms of spectral response. As an example, one measurement for a multi-color emission module that may result in a relatively high photocurrent signal is measurement of a green emission LED element using a detector configured to detect red light (in an embodiment, the detector is a red LED configured as a detector).
For the example described above of an emitter module having 12 compensation measurements including 6 photocurrent measurements, consider an embodiment in which two of the photocurrent measurements result in significantly higher photocurrent signals than the other photocurrent measurements. In such an embodiment, the number of detection intervals used before starting compensation measurements may be chosen such that one of these higher-photocurrent signals would be expected to occur if a nearby device is performing compensation measurements. If the sequence of the measurements is not known, for example, 11 intervals without detection of a non-constant illumination would be needed to be certain that one of the 2 “beacon” measurements should have occurred if interfering measurements are in progress. Alternatively, if the 2 “beacon” measurements are known to be evenly spaced within the measurement sequence (6 measurements apart, in this example), 6 intervals without detection of a non-constant illumination would be sufficient before beginning compensation measurements.
The embodiments described above relating to determining a number of detection intervals to use before starting compensation measurements can be illustrated using a timing diagram such as that of FIG. 13A . In FIG. 13A , detection intervals 1310 are used to determine whether measurements taken by another lamp can be detected. If no other measurements are detected, compensation measurements are initiated during subsequent intervals denoted in FIG. 13A as measurement intervals 1320. The necessary number of detection intervals 1310 in which no interfering measurement is detected depends on factors such as the number, nature and sequencing of compensation measurements, as discussed further above. The specific measurements illustrated in FIG. 13A as being performed during the first of measurement intervals 1320 are merely exemplary.
An alternative approach to that of FIG. 13A is shown in FIG. 13B . In the timing diagram of FIG. 13B , detection intervals 1310 are alternated with intervals in which non-sensitive measurements 1322 are taken. Non-sensitive measurements as used herein are measurements not affected significantly by external illumination. In an embodiment, non-sensitive measurements include forward voltage measurements across an LED element or a photodetector. As discussed further above in connection with FIG. 12 , such forward voltage measurements are expected to be non-sensitive if the forward-bias induced current in the measured LED element is large compared to the photocurrent induced by the external illumination. A timing sequence such as that of FIG. 13B may allow non-sensitive measurements to be taken earlier, while it is still being determined whether measurements sensitive to interfering illumination (denoted as sensitive measurements 1324) can be taken without interference. In an embodiment, detection for interfering measurements may be performed during the same interval as one of non-sensitive measurements 1322, as long as the detector used for detecting interference is not involved in the non-sensitive measurement. In an embodiment for which the non-sensitive measurement is a forward voltage measurement, the forward voltage measurement would need to be performed at a non-illuminating level of drive current to avoid error in performing detection at the same time.
In an embodiment for which non-sensitive measurements are performed during an overall detection sequence but detection is not performed during the intervals in which non-sensitive measurements are taken, the expected measurement sequence of any interfering devices would need to include enough consecutive higher-intensity measurements that a measurement sequence performed by a nearby device would be detected during one of the intervals when detection is performed. For example, in an embodiment of FIG. 13B in which no detection is performed during one or both of the intervals allocated to non-sensitive measurements 1322, higher-intensity measurements performed by an interfering device would need to be grouped so that at least two of the high-intensity measurements are performed in consecutive intervals. In this way, if the interfering device is performing measurements and one high-intensity measurement occurs in the same interval as a non-sensitive measurement 1322 and is not detected, the other consecutive high-intensity measurement would be detected during either the preceding or succeeding detection interval 1310.
The timing diagrams of FIGS. 13A and 13B illustrate examples of an approach in which some number of detection intervals is used to obtain an indication that no nearby device is performing interfering measurements. When no interfering measurement is observed after a sufficient number of detection intervals, compensation measurements are initiated during subsequent intervals. If, on the other hand, a non-constant illumination is detected during a detection interval, this is an indication that a nearby device is performing interfering measurements. Detection of a constant illumination during the interval is not associated with an interfering measurement in such an embodiment, because the effects of a constant external illumination on a photocurrent measurement can be removed by ambient subtraction such as that illustrated in FIG. 11A . In some embodiments, detection can be performed by taking photocurrent measurements during each of two portions of the interval, and then subtracting the photocurrents, in the manner described above for FIG. 11A . A non-zero result of the subtraction in such an embodiment indicates a non-constant illumination during the interval.
In an embodiment, detection of a non-constant illumination during a detection interval causes an illumination device to discontinue the detection sequence and return to driving the emission LED elements in the device to provide continuous illumination. In such an embodiment, the illumination device may be returned to a continuous illumination state uninterrupted by detection intervals or measurement intervals, similar to illumination periods 1010 of FIG. 10 above. In an alternative embodiment, a sequence of alternating illumination periods and intervals with the emission LED elements turned to non-operative levels may be continued after the detection sequence is discontinued, but without measurement taking place during the intervals. In a further embodiment, any intervals present after the detection sequence is suspended would not be used for detection or measurement until such time that a detection sequence is restarted.
When the detection sequence is discontinued after detection of a non-constant illumination during a detection interval, the measurement control circuit of the illumination device waits, in one embodiment, for some delay time before restarting the detection sequence. In a further embodiment, the delay time is a randomized delay time. After waiting for the delay time, the measurement control circuit may in one embodiment start again at the beginning of the detection sequence that was aborted upon detection of the non-continuous illumination. Alternatively, in some embodiments the detection sequence may be picked up at a point after the beginning of the sequence. In an embodiment, the detection sequence is started again at the point in the sequence when the non-continuous illumination was previously detected. Such an embodiment may be suitable, for example, in a sequence such as that of FIG. 13B in which some non-sensitive measurements are performed successfully in an earlier detection sequence before it is aborted.
As an alternative to the above-described embodiments of suspending a detection sequence and resuming detection after a delay, another approach to handling detection of a non-constant illumination during a detection interval may be suitable in certain embodiments. In an embodiment for which the sequence of measurements expected to be performed by an interfering device is known, detection of a non-constant illumination during one or more detection intervals may allow a measurement control circuit to predict which upcoming intervals will or will not contain interfering measurements. In such an embodiment, the measurement control circuit may be able to select a starting interval for its own measurement sequence such that each of the two devices is able to complete its respective measurement sequence without obtaining erroneous results. An example of such a scenario is illustrated by FIG. 14 .
The pair of timing diagrams in FIG. 14 is for two emitter modules, designated Lamp A and Lamp B, similar to those described in the discussion of FIG. 12 above. Each lamp is operating in a compensation mode such as that within a compensation period 1020 of FIG. 10 , in which periods of illumination 1402 are interrupted by intervals including intervals 1410, 1420, 1430, 1440 and 1450. At the beginning of each interval the emission LED elements within the lamp are turned off (or to a non-illuminating level) and detection may be performed or a measurement associated with a particular LED element and/or detector may be taken. In the embodiment of FIG. 14 , intervals 1410 and 1420 are detection intervals for Lamp A. These intervals are measurement intervals for Lamp B, however. In the embodiment of FIG. 14 , Lamp B is carrying out a sequence of 8 measurements in which a forward voltage for each of four emission LED elements is followed by a measurement of photocurrent induced in a detector when a drive current is applied to that LED element. The lower timing diagram in FIG. 14 therefore shows the entire sequence of measurements carried out by Lamp B. In an embodiment, this measurement sequence is repeated continuously using subsequent intervals. In another embodiment, the lamp returns to a continuous illumination mode such as an illumination period 1010 of FIG. 10 , and the measurement sequence is repeated if a change in operating conditions is detected or at certain preset times.
During interval 1410, Lamp B carries out a forward voltage measurement Vf1B of a first emission LED element. Even in an embodiment for which Lamps A and B are in close proximity and/or facing one another, Lamp A does not detect any significant non-constant illumination from the measurement by Lamp B as long as the drive current for the measurement Vf1B is at a level too low to result in illumination. During interval 1420, however, Lamp A does, in this embodiment, detect a non-constant illumination associated with the measurement by Lamp B of photocurrent Iph1B induced in a detector when the first LED element is illuminated. In the embodiment of FIG. 14 , the sequence of measurements employed by potentially interfering lamps, including Lamp B, is known to the control circuit of Lamp A, and Lamp A employs the same sequence for its own compensation measurements. Upon detecting a non-constant illumination during interval 1420, the control circuit of Lamp A determines that an interfering lamp made a photocurrent measurement during that interval. Because the measurement sequence is known to alternate photocurrent measurements with non-illuminating forward voltage measurements, the control circuit of Lamp A can predict that the interfering lamp will make a forward voltage measurement during the next interval, interval 1430. Because the measurement sequence begins with a forward voltage measurement, the control circuit of Lamp A waits for one additional interval and begins the measurement sequence for Lamp A at interval 1440. In this way, the photocurrent measurements by Lamp B line up in the same intervals as the non-sensitive, and non-interfering, forward voltage measurements by Lamp A.
In the embodiment of FIG. 14 , both Lamps A and B can keep repeating the measurement sequence continuously in subsequent intervals, if desired, without interfering with each other's measurements. An approach such as that of FIG. 14 , in which potentially interfering lamps perform measurement sequences in an overlapping manner that avoids interference, may be particularly suitable for embodiments in which a measurement sequence is repeated continuously. In an embodiment with continuous compensation measurements, the alternate approach described above, of suspending measurements when an interference is detected and attempting measurements again after a delay, may be less effective. For the measurement sequence used in FIG. 14 having alternating photocurrent and forward voltage measurements, the control circuit of Lamp A can determine an interval for starting a non-interfering measurement sequence after detection of just one interfering measurement. In embodiments using different measurement sequences, the control circuit may need to detect multiple interfering measurements in order to determine a starting interval for a non-interfering measurement sequence. In the case of some measurement sequences, overlapping but non-interfering measurement sequences may not be available.
The approach of FIG. 14 depends on access by the control circuit of an illumination device to the measurement sequence used by potential interfering devices. One embodiment in which the control circuit may have such information is an installation in which the lamps in close proximity to one another are all made by the same manufacturer and use the same control sequence. In another embodiment, a control circuit has information on measurement sequences of potential interfering lamps because the lamps in close proximity to one another are manufactured to a common standard that specifies the measurement sequence. In installations having lamps in close proximity that use different measurement sequences, information regarding the measurement sequences of various other lamps may in some embodiments be available to the control circuit of an illumination device. An illumination device may in certain embodiments include a data structure storing configuration information including compensation measurement sequences for various potentially interfering lamp models. In embodiments for which interference by lamps having multiple different measurement sequences is a possibility, the control circuit may need to detect multiple interfering measurements before determining which measurement sequence is being used by another device and whether overlapping measurement sequences are possible without interference.
The discussion above of FIGS. 13 and 14 describes ways that detection during some number of intervals before performing compensation measurements during subsequent intervals can help to avoid measurement errors caused by interfering measurements by nearby illumination devices. In some cases, however, measurement errors may occur despite use of the above-described detection techniques. For example, a prediction that a lamp may safely begin making measurements based on the expected measurement sequence of a single interfering lamp may be in error if multiple nearby lamps are making measurements. As another example, measurement errors can occur if two or more lamps are performing detection during the same intervals and, each detecting no other measurements, both begin measurements at the same time.
In an embodiment, measurement errors are detected by checking to see whether a measured value is within an expected range. In a further embodiment, the expected range is based on the most recently stored value of the measured quantity. In such an embodiment, the expected range accounts for the magnitude of expected variations in the measured quantity caused by factors such as LED aging or temperature change of an LED element. In one embodiment, a measured value is outside of the expected range if it varies by more than about 5 percent from the most recently stored value of the measured quantity. In another embodiment, a measured value is outside of the expected range if it varies by more than about 3 percent from the most recently stored value. In yet another embodiment, a measured value is outside of the expected range if it varies by more than about 2 percent from the most recently stored value. Other thresholds for considering a measurement out-of-range may be used, depending on factors such as the volatility of the particular quantity being measured and the degree of accuracy required for compensation and control of the illumination device. If the measured value is outside of the expected range, the measured value is discarded rather than stored. In an embodiment, the measurement sequence continues after an out-of range measurement is detected, with in-range measurements stored while out-of-range measurements are discarded. In an alternative embodiment, an out-of-range measurement causes the measurement sequence to be suspended. In such an embodiment, the control circuit of the illumination device may wait for a delay time and then attempt the measurement sequence again. The new attempt may start at the beginning of the sequence, or alternatively may start with the measurement that was out of range. In another embodiment in which the measurement sequence is suspended after an out-of-range measurement, the control circuit may wait for a delay time and then begin a detection sequence before attempting measurements again.
Checking for whether a measurement is in range is in some embodiments combined with methods described above for detection during some number of intervals before performing compensation measurements. In an alternative embodiment, measurements are performed without any detection intervals beforehand, with the measured values checked for being out of an expected range. In still another embodiment, measurements are initially performed without detection beforehand, but if an out-of-range value is obtained, a detection method as described above is employed before resuming measurements. In some embodiments, checking for whether a measurement is in range is performed only for interference-sensitive measurements such as photocurrent measurements. In other embodiments, all measured values are checked for being within an expected range.
Approaches described above to avoiding interference from nearby illumination devices when performing compensation measurements include performing detection to predict interference-free intervals for taking measurements, checking measured values to determine whether measurement error has occurred, and suspending and reattempting detection and/or measurements in the event that interference is detected. Another approach to avoiding interference is to use a different set of intervals than that used by a potentially interfering device. In an embodiment of this approach, one set of periodic intervals is established having a first offset time from a periodic timing reference, while another set of periodic intervals is established having a second offset time from the timing reference. An exemplary timing diagram illustrating such an embodiment is shown in FIG. 15 .
In the embodiment of FIG. 15 , a timing reference signal 1520 is generated from an AC reference signal 1510. In an embodiment, timing reference signal 1520 is generated from AC signal 1510 using a phase locked loop (PLL) circuit. In the example of FIG. 15 , reference signal 1520 has a frequency of six times that of AC signal 1510. In an embodiment, AC signal 1510 is the AC mains signal, typically having a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz. For an AC mains frequency of 60 Hz, reference signal 1520 has a frequency of 360 Hz in the embodiment of FIG. 15 . Waveform 1530 illustrates the drive current variation with time for an illumination device, such as an emitter module, using a first set of intervals for compensation measurements. As discussed in connection with FIG. 6 above, “on” current Ion represents a combination of one or more different drive currents applied as appropriate to respective different LED elements within the illumination device, to produce the desired illumination. During periodic measurement intervals the drive currents are reduced to a level Ioff at which none of the LED elements are operating, or illuminated, except for a single LED element that may be subject to measurement during the interval. Each of the intervals has a duration 1532 and is separated from a rising edge of timing reference 1520 by a first offset 1536. Waveform 1540 illustrates the drive current variation with time for an illumination device using a second set of intervals for compensation measurements. Waveform 1540 is similar to waveform 1530, except that the periodic intervals in waveform 1540 are separated from a rising edge of timing reference 1520 by a second offset 1546.
If one emitter module is configured to perform compensation measurements using a first set of measurement intervals such as those of waveform 1530, and another emitter module is configured to perform its compensation measurements using a second set of measurement intervals such as those of waveform 1540, measurements by the two emitter modules will not interfere with one another because the two sets of measurement intervals are displaced in time. In an embodiment, lamps or emitter modules that are to be placed in close proximity are assigned to different sets of measurement intervals. Such an embodiment may be particularly suitable for illumination fixtures containing multiple lamps or emitter modules. In another embodiment, an emitter module may initially use one set of measurement intervals and later switch to another set of measurement intervals if interference from nearby devices is encountered. This type of embodiment may be suitable in the case of an individual emitter module, since the configuration of lamps that it may be operated in proximity to is typically not known.
In the example described above of a 60 Hz AC signal and a 360 Hz timing reference signal used in the embodiment of FIG. 15 , timing reference signal 1520 has a period of approximately 2.8 milliseconds. Using these values and the dimensions as drawn in FIG. 15 , the measurement intervals of waveforms 1530 and 1540 have a duration of approximately 550 microseconds while the first offset is approximately 800 microseconds and the second offset approximately 2 milliseconds. It should be noted that the measurement intervals may have any duration sufficient to perform any compensation measurement needed. In an embodiment, the measurement interval should be long enough to allow a period of measuring the desired quantity and a period for ambient measurement. At the same time, it is preferred in some embodiments to have measurement intervals be as short as possible in order to reduce effects such as “flicker” caused by turning the LED elements on and off. In one embodiment, the measurement interval duration is approximately 100 microseconds. The number of different sets of measurement intervals that may be used depends on the period of the timing reference signal and the duration of the measurement interval.
In one embodiment having a timing reference signal with frequency of an integer N times the frequency of an AC reference signal (like the embodiment of FIG. 15 , where N=6), the number of intervals in a measurement sequence is set to be an integral multiple of N. For the example of FIG. 15 in which N=6, the number of intervals in the measurement sequence in this embodiment would be set to a multiple of 6, even if some intervals were left empty in order to do so. In this way, repetition of the measurement sequence would cause repetitions of any individual measurement to occur at the same point in the phase of the AC signal. In an alternative embodiment with a timing reference signal having a frequency of N times the AC reference signal, the number of intervals in the measurement sequence is instead set to a number that is not an integral multiple of N. In such an embodiment repetition of the measurement sequence would cause repetitions of any individual measurement to occur at different points in the phase of the AC signal. In a further embodiment, values obtained from repetitions of an individual measurement are averaged. In such an embodiment, use of a number of measurements that is not an integral multiple of N may provide a more accurate measurement when results from repetitions of a measurement taken at different AC phase points are averaged.
Flowcharts of exemplary methods of performing interference-resistant compensation measurements using the approaches described above are shown in FIGS. 16A through 16C . The flowchart of FIG. 16A is for a method in which no detection is performed before beginning a sequence of measurements. In the embodiment of FIG. 16A , photocurrent measurements include subtraction of ambient photocurrent, and the method includes determining whether photocurrent values are within an expected range. The starting point for the method is operation of one or more emission LED elements within an illumination device or emitter module at respective drive currents to produce the desired illumination (step 1602). This illumination is continued until the control circuit of the illumination device determines that it is time to take compensation measurements (decision 1604). In some embodiments, compensation measurements are performed at specific times. In other embodiments the measurements may be performed when a change is detected in operating conditions, such as temperature of the illumination device or a change in drive current supplied to one or more of the emission LEDs to alter the lumen output or color point setting of the illumination device. In still other embodiments, periodic compensation measurement intervals may be created throughout the time the illumination fixture is operating, and compensation measurement sequences may be continually repeated using those intervals.
In the embodiment of FIG. 16A , a measurement counter is initialized to keep track of which measurements in a measurement sequence have been performed (step 1606). All of the emission LED elements are then turned off (to non-operative or non-illuminating levels) at the start of the next measurement interval (step 1608). The measurement interval is one of a set of intervals such as those discussed in connection with FIGS. 6, 8 and 10-15 above. If the measurement to be performed is not a photocurrent measurement, the measurement is performed during the interval and the result of the measurement is stored (decision 1610, step 1612, step 1614). A non-photocurrent measurement may include, for example, a forward voltage measurement across an emission LED or a photodetector. Methods of performing forward voltage measurements are described further in the co-pending applications referenced herein. After the result is stored, the measurement counter is incremented and the emission LED elements are turned back on to produce illumination (steps 1616, 1618).
If a photocurrent measurement is performed, the emission LED element to be tested is turned on using the desired drive current during a first part of the measurement interval (decision 1610 and step 1622). In one embodiment, the emission LED element is turned on for half of the measurement interval. In other embodiments, the emission LED element is turned on for a different fraction of the measurement interval. The photocurrent on a detector within the illumination device or emitter module is measured during the part of the measurement interval when the tested LED element is turned on (step 1624). The detector used in the measurement may be referred to herein as a measurement photodetector and the photocurrent detected by the measurement may be referred to as a measurement photocurrent. During a second part of the measurement interval, the tested LED element is turned off (while the other emission LED elements remain turned off) (step 1626). The ambient or background photocurrent induced in the detector is measured during this second part of the measurement interval (step 1628). As noted in the discussion of FIG. 11 above, the photocurrent values may be obtained using averaging and/or other signal processing techniques known to those of ordinary skill in the art in view of this disclosure. In some embodiments, the first part of the measurement interval during which the LED element is turned on is at the beginning of the interval, as illustrated by portion 1104 of FIG. 11 . In other embodiments, the first part is at the end of the interval, and the ambient measurement in the second part of the interval is done before the measurement of photocurrent from the driven LED element.
When both the photocurrent induced by the driven LED element and the ambient photocurrent have been measured, the ambient photocurrent is subtracted from the photocurrent induced by the driven emission LED element to obtain a corrected photocurrent (step 1630). In an embodiment, this subtraction is done in hardware. The corrected photocurrent is then checked to see whether it is within an expected range (decision 1632). In an embodiment, the expected range is based on a target value of the photocurrent, or on the most recent reliable measured value. The expected range is in some embodiments set to be larger than the expected variation of the photocurrent caused by temperature variation or LED aging. If the corrected photocurrent is within the expected range, it is stored (step 1614) and the measurement counter is incremented (step 1616).
In the embodiment of FIG. 16A , if the corrected photocurrent is out of the expected range, storage of the corrected value is skipped (N branch of decision 1632). Incrementing of the measurement counter and continuing on with the next measurement in the sequence ( steps 1616 and 1618, decision 1620) are performed in the same way whether the photocurrent measurement is stored or discarded. In this embodiment, a measurement for which the result is not stored can be attempted again when its turn comes up in the next measurement sequence. In an alternate embodiment to that of FIG. 16A , the measurement sequence is suspended when an out-of-range measurement is discovered. In such an embodiment, the measurement sequence may be re-attempted after a delay time or after changing to a different set of measurement intervals. Some of these options are illustrated in the method of FIG. 16B discussed below.
At the end of the measurement interval, one or more of the emission LED elements are again operated to produce the desired illumination (step 1618). As compensation measurements are taken and evaluated, the drive currents applied to the respective LED elements to obtain desired illumination may be adjusted, as described further in the co-pending applications referenced herein. In the embodiment of FIG. 16A , the sequence of measurements is continued, with any photocurrent measurements either stored or discarded, until the end of the sequence (decision 1620). At the end of the sequence, a new measurement sequence may be started as determined by the control circuit (decision 1604). As discussed above, measurement sequences may be repeated continually in some embodiments, or performed only at certain times or under certain conditions. In one embodiment, a measurement sequence is repeated if an out-of-range measurement is detected in the previous sequence.
Variations of the method of FIG. 16A will be recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art in view of this disclosure. For example, for this and all flowcharts described herein, a group of steps in between two decision points of the flowchart may often be performed in more than one order. Although the embodiment of FIG. 16A performs ambient subtraction only for photocurrent measurements, in another embodiment a similar scheme of interval portions and subtraction could be used for non-photocurrent measurements. In some embodiments, non-photocurrent measurements can also be checked for being within an expected range.
An exemplary flowchart for a method of detecting during a series of intervals prior to starting compensation measurements is shown in FIG. 16B . In the same manner as discussed above for FIG. 16A , the method begins with operation of one or more emission LED elements to produce the desired illumination (step 1602). This illumination is continued until the control circuit of the illumination device determines that it is time to take compensation measurements (decision 1604). After it is determined that compensation measurements are to be taken, the control circuit initializes a counter for “collisions,” or determinations that another device is making a measurement during an interval. Counters are also initialized for free intervals, or intervals in which no measurement by another device is detected, and for contiguous free intervals since the last collision (step 1634). All of the emission LED elements are turned “off”, or to non-operative levels, at the start of the next interval (step 1636), which in the embodiment of FIG. 16B is used as a detection interval similar to intervals 1310 in FIG. 13 . The photocurrent induced in a detector within the illumination device is monitored during the detection interval (step 1638). The detector used during a detection interval may be referred to herein as a “detection interval photodetector,” and the photocurrent induced during the detection interval as “detection photocurrent.” In an embodiment, the detection interval photodetector and measurement photodetector used during compensation measurements are the same photodetector. In an alternative embodiment, the detection interval photodetector and measurement photodetectors are different detectors. In some embodiments, different measurement photodetectors are used for photocurrent measurements of different LED elements. Such embodiments may allow a more favorable combination of wavelengths of the tested LED element and the photodetector. Unless otherwise specified, any of the detectors referenced herein may be either a dedicated photodetector or an LED element temporarily configured as a photodetector.
If no non-constant illumination is detected during the interval (decisions 1640 and 1654), a “free” interval is recorded by incrementing the free interval counter and contiguous free interval counter (step 1658). The emission LED elements are turned back on to resume illumination at the end of the interval (step 1656). In the embodiment of FIG. 16B , a number of contiguous free intervals has been designated as an indicator that no other device is likely to be taking measurements using the same set of intervals. Considerations for determining a suitable number of free contiguous intervals are described above in the discussion of FIGS. 12 and 13 . When the designated number of contiguous free intervals has been reached, compensation measurements are started in the next interval (decision 1660 and step 1662). Measurements may then proceed in any suitable manner, including a manner similar to that illustrated in FIG. 16A .
If non-constant illumination is detected during an interval, the collision counter is incremented and the contiguous free interval counter is reset (decision 1640 and steps 1644 and 1646). The emission LED elements are turned back on as usual to resume illumination at the end of the interval (step 1642). If a maximum number of collisions has not been reached, the control circuit waits for a delay time before attempting detection again (decision 1648, steps 1650 and 1636). In an embodiment, the delay time is a randomized delay time. In a further embodiment, the delay time is determined using the collision counter, such that after each successive collision the delay time is progressively longer. For example, in one embodiment the delay time is randomized within a specific range, and that range is set to progressively higher values after each successive collision. In a further embodiment, the delay time increases after each successive collision at an exponential rate.
In an embodiment of the method of FIG. 16B , detection of non-constant illumination refers to detection of illumination having an intensity that varies substantially with time during the detection interval, or during a portion of the detection interval in which detection is performed. In a further embodiment, illumination intensity varies substantially with time if the variation would be large enough to induce a significant error in a photocurrent measurement conducted during the same interval. In some embodiments, a substantial variation in intensity is defined in terms of the intensity of illumination produced by a photocurrent measurement within the illumination device performing a method such as that of FIG. 16B . In a further embodiment, a substantial variation in intensity is defined in terms of the intensity of illumination produced by the LED element within the illumination device producing the lowest illumination intensity during photocurrent measurements performed as part of a compensation measurement sequence. For example, a substantial variation in intensity with time may be defined in one embodiment as a variation large enough that the change in intensity during the interval is greater than about 5% of the intensity produced by the LED element within the illumination device having the lowest illumination intensity during photocurrent measurements. In a further embodiment, a substantial variation is a variation large enough that the change in intensity during the interval is greater than about 3% of the intensity produced by the LED element within the illumination device having the lowest illumination intensity during photocurrent measurements. In a still further embodiment, a substantial variation is a variation large enough that the change in intensity during the interval is greater than about 2% of the intensity produced by the LED element within the illumination device having the lowest illumination intensity during photocurrent measurements. Other thresholds for detecting interference may be used, depending on factors such as the degree of accuracy required for compensation and control of the illumination device.
If measurements by other devices continue to be detected during repeated attempts separated by delay times, a maximum number of collisions may be reached (decision 1648). At this point, the control circuit changes to a different series of measurement intervals, separated from a timing reference by a different offset time (step 1652). Such sets of intervals are described above in connection with waveforms 1530 and 1540 in FIG. 15 . In the embodiment of FIG. 16B , the detection sequence is restarted by resetting all counters after a change to a new set of intervals (step 1634). A change to a new series of intervals such as that of FIG. 16B may be particularly suitable in the case of an illumination device including a single lamp or emission module. Changing of an interval series may be less appropriate in the case of a multiple-lamp device, such as that described below in connection with FIG. 18 . In a multi-lamp device, each lamp may be assigned to a specific interval series in order to avoid interference between them, such that changing of the interval series could in some cases increase the likelihood of interference.
Variations of the method of FIG. 16B will be recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art in view of this disclosure. For example, in the embodiment of FIG. 16B a collision is detected by monitoring the entire detection interval for non-constant illumination. In another embodiment, only a portion of the detection interval is monitored, based on knowledge of when during the interval a change in illumination intensity caused by an interfering measurement is expected to take place. For example, the expected intensity variation may be associated with a transition between driving an LED element for a photocurrent measurement and having the LED element turned off for an ambient photocurrent measurement, as shown in FIG. 11A . In such an embodiment, if the time of the change between the LED measurement and ambient measurement portions of the interval is known, the monitoring can be done over a range including that transition time.
An alternative method of detecting prior to starting compensation measurements is illustrated by the flowchart of FIG. 16C . The method of FIG. 16C is similar in some respects to that of FIG. 16B , but in FIG. 16C there does not always have to be a certain number of contiguous free intervals detected before compensation measurements can start. In certain situations the method of FIG. 16C allows a measurement sequence to be started if it can be overlapped with an ongoing measurement sequence of another device in such a way that the measurements do not interfere with (i.e. cause measurement errors for) one another.
Although not shown in FIG. 16C , the context of the method is the same as for FIGS. 16A and 16B in that one or more LED elements are operated to produce the desired illumination until the control circuit of the illumination device determines that it is time to take compensation measurements (see steps 1602 and 1604 of FIGS. 16A and 16B ). Monitoring for non-constant illumination is performed in the same manner as for FIG. 16B , and in the event that a designated number of contiguous free intervals is reached, a measurement sequence is started in the same way as in the method of FIG. 16B (steps 1638-1662, going down right side of flowchart). The method of FIG. 16C differs from that of FIG. 16B in the event that a collision is detected, however. Instead of automatically instituting a delay or a change in interval series after a collision is detected, the control circuit in the embodiment of FIG. 16C determines whether the measurement sequence causing the detected collision is known (decision 1664). If the interfering measurement sequence is known, the control circuit determines whether it can initiate compensation measurements that overlap with those of the other device in a manner that avoids interference (step 1670).
In an embodiment, determinations as to whether an interfering measurement sequence is known and whether overlapping, but non-interfering, measurements may be conducted are done using configuration information such as that shown in FIG. 17 . The chart of FIG. 17 includes exemplary configuration information that may be contained in a data structure stored on the illumination device. In an embodiment, such configuration information may be stored in the same storage medium that contains a calibration table used for compensating the operation of the illumination device to account for changes in temperature or LED characteristics. In the embodiment of FIG. 17 , configuration information 1700 includes measurement sequences for three different illumination devices, designated Brand A, Brand B, and Brand C. In an embodiment, the three illumination devices are made by different manufacturers. Configuration information 1702 is for the Brand A device, while information 1704 and 1706 is for the Brand B and Brand C devices, respectively. Controlled device information 1710 indicates that the controlled device (the one that configuration information 1700 is stored in) is a Brand A device in this embodiment.
In the embodiment of FIG. 17 , actual measurement sequences for all three devices are known. In other embodiments, specific measurement sequences for devices made by other manufacturers may not be known. In such an embodiment, data on whether measurements are sensitive or interfering may be experimentally obtainable (for example, through use of an external detector), even if the actual measurements are unknown. In an alternative embodiment of the method of FIG. 16C , decision block 1664 determines whether the order of interfering and non-interfering measurements within the interfering measurement sequence is known, rather than whether the actual measurements within the sequence are known.
The remaining information in configuration data 1700 characterizes the measurement sequence for each device in ways that may be helpful in determining whether an overlapping measurement sequence can be formed. In an embodiment, an overlapping but not interfering measurement sequence can be conducted as long as any sensitive measurements in one sequence of measurements performed by one device are not performed in the same interval as an interfering measurement in another sequence of measurements performed by a nearby device. Because in the embodiment of FIG. 17 sensitive measurements and interfering measurements are the same, much of the configuration information is described in terms of sensitive measurements, but is also applicable to interfering measurements. In this embodiment, the rule for conducting overlapping but not interfering measurements can be restated as making sure that a sensitive measurement in one sequence is not performed in the same interval as a sensitive measurement in the other sequence.
Within configuration information 1700, number of sensitive measurements 1712 indicates the number of sensitive measurements within each sequence. In the embodiment of FIG. 17 there are four sensitive measurements (the four photocurrent measurements) in each sequence. The number of non-sensitive measurements 1714 is accordingly eight for each of the devices. As a first-order indicator, a high fraction of sensitive (or interfering) measurements in a measurement sequence can make it less likely that an overlapping measurement sequence can be performed. For example, if in an alternate embodiment the measurement sequence for the Brand A device had 7 out of 12 interfering measurements rather than 4 out of 12, it would be very difficult to overlap measurement sequences for two Brand A devices in close proximity to one another without having a sensitive measurement by one device performed in the same interval as a sensitive (and interfering) measurement by the other device. It could be done if each device ran its measurement sequence only once without repeating, and most of the sensitive measurements by one device were finished before the second device started its sequence. A non-interfering overlap would not be possible in this embodiment, however, if either of the devices were configured to immediately repeat its measurement sequence.
Same-sequence non-interfering offset 1716 refers to a number of intervals by which a device performing a measurement sequence needs to offset (i.e., delay) its sequence with respect to another device performing the same sequence. For example, if a Brand A device detected a photocurrent measurement performed by an interfering device and it was known that the interfering device was also a Brand A device, it would be known from Brand A configuration information 1702 that the next measurement, if any, by the interfering device would be a non-interfering (non-photocurrent) measurement. The detecting device could not start its measurement sequence during that next interval, because the non-interfering first measurement of its sequence would align with the non-interfering next measurement of the interfering sequence. Because much of the Brand A measurement sequence alternates between interfering and non-interfering measurements, aligning two non-interfering measurements between the devices would likely cause alignment of two interfering (and sensitive) measurements in a subsequent interval of the sequence. If the detecting device delays one more interval before starting its sequence, however, any remaining sensitive (photocurrent) measurements by the interfering device should align with a non-sensitive measurement by the detecting device. This delay has the effect of offsetting, or shifting, the measurement sequence of the detecting device by an odd number of intervals from that of the interfering device.
Using a similar analysis for the measurement sequence of the Brand B device, it can be seen from configuration information 1704 that an offset 1716 of either 2 or 6 intervals would allow another Brand B device to perform an overlapping measurement sequence. Similarly, for the sequence of the Brand C device, an offset of between 4 and 8 intervals would allow another Brand C device to perform an overlapping but non-interfering measurement sequence.
Another quantity included in configuration information 1700 is interval range 1718 including all sensitive measurements. The Brand A sequence has a range 1718 of 7 intervals, from interval 2 to interval 8, in which all of the sensitive measurements are performed. The Brand B sequence has a range 1718 of 6 intervals, from interval 3 to interval 8. For the brand C device, all of the sensitive measurements are performed within a range 1718 of 4 intervals.
Also included in configuration information 1700 is interval range 1720 of the most contiguous non-sensitive measurements within a measurement sequence. Interval range 1720 is 5 for the sequence of Brand A, from interval 9 to interval 1 (assuming that the measurement sequence is continually repeated). For the measurement sequence of Brand B, interval range 1720 is 6 intervals, from interval 9 to interval 2. For the sequence of Brand C, interval range 1720 is eight intervals, from interval 5 to interval 12. Interval ranges 1718 and 1720 may be useful in determining whether different measurement sequences, such as those used by different device manufacturers, may be overlapped without interference. For example, the measurement sequences of the three devices of configuration information 1700 are too different to allow non-interfering overlap of two different device sequences using a simple one- or two-interval shift. In some cases, however, a larger shift can align a contiguous range of non-sensitive measurements in one sequence with the entire range of sensitive measurements in another sequence. To illustrate, the measurement sequence of Brand A in FIG. 17 can overlap with the sequence of Brand C if the Brand A sequence is shifted so that interval 2 of the Brand A sequence is aligned with interval 5 or 6 of the Brand C sequence. In this way, all of the sensitive measurements in the Brand A sequence are performed in intervals with non-sensitive measurements by the Brand C device. On the other hand, the measurement sequence of a Brand A device cannot overlap with that of a Brand B device, because there is no contiguous range of non-sensitive measurements in the Brand B sequence large enough to accommodate the range of intervals in the Brand A sequence including sensitive measurements.
Returning to the method of FIG. 16C , configuration information such as that of FIG. 17 may be used by the control circuit of an illumination device in determining (for decision 1664) whether a measurement sequence associated with a detected measurement is known. In an embodiment for which the configuration information of FIG. 17 is used, a single detection of an interfering measurement by another device would not in itself be enough to determine whether which of the known measurement sequences is being used by the interfering device. If the interfering measurement sequence is not known, the control circuit initiates a detection process during the next interval to get further information (N branch of decision 1664 and step 1636). In the embodiment of FIG. 16C , a change of interval series after a maximum number of collisions is included (decision 1666 and 1668) to avoid an endless loop if the control circuit is unable to determine the measurement sequence used by the interfering device. This change to a different series of intervals is similar to that described above for FIG. 16B .
In some embodiments, the control circuit is able to determine a measurement sequence used by the interfering device by monitoring the collision, free interval, and contiguous free interval counters during successive intervals. For example, a sequence of a detected photocurrent measurement (i.e., a collision), followed by a non-sensitive measurement (which increments the free interval and contiguous free interval counters), followed by another sensitive measurement (which increments the collision counter and clears the contiguous free interval counter) indicates that the sequence of Brand A is used by the interfering device. A sequence of three sensitive measurements in a row, on the other hand, would indicate that the sequence of Brand C is used by the interfering device.
If the sequence of the interfering measurements is known, the control circuit determines whether an overlapping, but non-interfering, measurement sequence by the controlled device is possible (decision 1670). In an embodiment, configuration information such as that of FIG. 17 is used to determine whether such an overlapping measurement configuration is possible. In addition to the considerations discussed above in connection with FIG. 17 , the control circuit may in an embodiment consider whether the measurement sequence of the controlled device should be changed. For example, in an embodiment for which an interfering device uses a different measurement sequence than the controlled device, an overlapping measurement sequence may become easier or possible if the controlled device changes its measurement sequence to be more compatible with that of the interfering device. Changing of a device's measurement sequence may in some embodiments make prediction of a device's behavior by other devices more difficult. However, in embodiments in which there are a limited number of measurement sequences used and the illumination devices are capable of detecting the sequence used by an interfering device, temporary adjustment of a device's measurement sequence may be a useful option for avoiding interference.
In the embodiment of FIG. 16C , if overlapping measurements are a possibility, the measurement sequence is revised if necessary to achieve the non-interfering overlap (decision 1670 and step 1672). The measurement sequence is started in the next interval if appropriate, or delayed for a suitable number of intervals if needed to achieve a non-interfering measurement sequence (decision 1674 and step 1662). If overlapping measurements are not possible, the control circuit changes to a different set of intervals and begins the detection sequence again (decision 1670, steps 1668 and 1634). In an alternate embodiment, another approach such as a delay time is used instead of changing to a different set of intervals. Variations of the method of FIG. 16C will be recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art in view of this disclosure. It is noted, for example, that configuration information for compensation measurement sequences of illumination devices may be more complex than that shown in FIG. 17 . Additional measurements may be taken in some embodiments, such as additional forward voltage measurements using alternate detectors. In some embodiments of illumination devices storing configuration information for other illumination devices, measurement sequences are not necessarily the same length for each device. In embodiments for which non-sensitive measurements are not necessarily non-interfering measurements, configuration information such as that of FIG. 17 may include quantities defined separately for sensitive measurements and interfering measurements. Analysis in such an embodiment may be more complex than that described for FIG. 17 . Variations of the methods of FIGS. 16A, 16B and 16C may be combined, resulting in many possible methods of avoiding interference-related error when performing compensation measurements for illumination devices.
Exemplary Embodiments of Improved Illumination Devices
The improved methods described herein for controlling an illumination device may be used within substantially any LED illumination device having a plurality of emission LED elements and one or more photodetectors. As described in more detail below, the improved methods described herein may be implemented within an LED illumination device in the form of hardware, software or a combination of both.
Illumination devices, which benefit from the improved methods described herein, may have substantially any form factor including, but not limited to, parabolic lamps (e.g., PAR 20, 30 or 38), linear lamps, flood lights and mini-reflectors. In some cases, the illumination devices may be installed in a ceiling or wall of a building, and may be connected to an AC mains or some other AC power source. However, a skilled artisan would understand how the improved methods described herein may be used within other types of illumination devices powered by other power sources (e.g., batteries or solar energy).
Exemplary embodiments of an improved illumination device are described with reference to FIGS. 18-21 , which show different types of LED illumination devices, each having one or more emitter modules. Although examples are provided herein, the present invention is not limited to any particular type of LED illumination device or emitter module design. A skilled artisan would understand how the method steps described herein may be applied to other types of LED illumination devices having substantially different emitter module designs.
A computer-generated representation of a top view of an exemplary emitter module 1820 that may be included within the linear lamp 1810 of FIG. 18A is shown in FIG. 18B . In the illustrated embodiment, emitter module 1820 includes four differently colored emission LEDs 1830, which are arranged in a square array and placed as close as possible together in the center of a primary optics structure (e.g., a dome) 1840, so as to approximate a centrally located point source. In some embodiments, the emission LEDs 1830 may each be configured for producing illumination at a different peak emission wavelength. For example, the emission LEDs 1830 may include RGBW LEDs or RGBY LEDs. In addition to the emission LEDs 1830, a dedicated photodetector 1850 is included within the dome 1840 and arranged somewhere around the periphery of the emission LED array. The dedicated photodetector 1850 may be any device (such as a silicon photodiode or an LED) that produces current indicative of incident light.
In the illustrated embodiment, emitter module 1920 includes an array of emission LEDs 1930 and a plurality of dedicated photodetectors 1950, all of which are mounted on a common substrate and encapsulated within a primary optics structure (e.g., a dome) 1940. In some embodiments, the array of emission LEDs 1930 may include a number of differently colored chains of LEDS, wherein each chain is configured for producing illumination at a different peak emission wavelength. According to one embodiment, the array of emission LEDs 1930 may include a chain of four red LEDs, a chain of four green LEDs, a chain of four blue LEDs, and a chain of four white or yellow LEDs. Each chain of LEDs is coupled in series and driven with the same drive current. In some embodiments, the individual LEDs in each chain may be scattered about the array, and arranged so that no color appears twice in any row, column or diagonal, to improve color mixing within the emitter module 1920.
In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 19B , four dedicated photodetectors 1950 are included within the dome 1940 and arranged around the periphery of the array. In some embodiments, the dedicated photodetectors 1950 may be placed close to, and in the middle of, each edge of the array and may be connected in parallel to a receiver of the illumination device. By connecting the dedicated photodetectors 1950 in parallel with the receiver, the photocurrents induced on each photodetector may be summed to minimize the spatial variation between the similarly colored LEDs, which may be scattered about the array. The dedicated photodetectors 1950 may be any devices that produce current indicative of incident light (such as a silicon photodiode or an LED). In one embodiment, however, the dedicated photodetectors 1950 are preferably LEDs with peak emission wavelengths in the range of 500 nm to 700 nm. Photodetectors with such peak emission wavelengths will not produce photocurrent in response to infrared light, which reduces interference from ambient light. To the extent some amount of ambient light is nonetheless detectable during, for example, a photocurrent measurement, methods as described herein may be used to minimize compensation errors caused by such ambient light. For example, effects of a constant ambient illumination on a photocurrent measurement may be removed by subtraction as discussed above. In the case of non-constant external illumination, methods as described herein may be used to avoid taking photocurrent measurements in the presence of such non-constant illumination.
The illumination devices shown in FIGS. 18A and 19A and the emitter modules shown in FIGS. 18B and 19B are provided merely as examples of illumination devices in which the interference-resistant compensation methods described herein may be used. Further description of these illumination devices and emitter modules may be found in U.S. application Ser. No. 14/097,339 and U.S. Application No. 61/886,471, which are commonly assigned and incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. Still further description of additional emitter module embodiments may be found in co-pending U.S. application Ser. No. 14/314,530. However, the inventive concepts described herein are not limited to any particular type of LED illumination device, any particular number of emitter modules that may be included within an LED illumination device, or any particular number, color or arrangement of emission LEDs and photodetectors that may be included within an emitter module. Instead, the methods described herein may contemplate only an LED illumination device including a plurality of emission LEDs and at least one photodetector. In some embodiments, a dedicated photodetector may not be required, if one or more of the emission LEDs is configured, at times, to provide such functionality.
In the illustrated embodiment, illumination device 2000 comprises a plurality of emission LED elements 2045 and one or more dedicated photodetectors 2050. The emission LED elements 2045, in this example, comprise four chains of any number of LEDs. In typical embodiments, each chain may have 2 to 4 LEDs of the same color, which are coupled in series and configured to receive the same drive current. In one example, the emission LED elements 2045 may include a chain of red LEDs, a chain of green LEDs, a chain of blue LEDs, and a chain of white or yellow LEDs. However, the methods and devices described herein are not limited to any particular number of LED chains, any particular number of LEDs within the chains, or any particular color or combination of LED colors.
Similarly, the methods and devices described herein are not limited to any particular type, number, color, combination or arrangement of photodetectors. In one embodiment, the one or more dedicated photodetectors 2050 may include a small red, orange or yellow LED. In another embodiment, the one or more dedicated photodetectors 128 may include one or more small red LEDs and one or more small green LEDs. In some embodiments, one or more of the dedicated photodetector(s) 2050 shown in FIG. 20 may be omitted if one or more of the emission LEDs 2045 is configured, at times, to function as a photodetector. The plurality of emission LEDs 2045 and the (optional) dedicated photodetectors 2050 may be included within an emitter module, as discussed above. In some embodiments, an illumination device may include more than one emitter module, as discussed above.
In addition to including one or more emitter modules, illumination device 2000 includes various hardware and software components, which are configured for powering the illumination device and controlling the light output from the emitter module(s). In one embodiment, the illumination device is connected to AC mains 2005, and includes an AC/DC converter 2010 for converting AC mains power (e.g., 120V or 240V) to a DC voltage (VDC). As shown in FIG. 20 , this DC voltage (e.g., 15V) is supplied to the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 for producing the operative drive currents applied to the emission LEDs 2045 for producing illumination. In addition to the AC/DC converter, a DC/DC converter 2015 is included for converting the DC voltage VDC (e.g., 15V) to a lower voltage VL (e.g., 3.3V), which is used to power the low voltage circuitry included within the illumination device, such as PLL 2020, wireless interface 2025, and control circuit 2035.
In the illustrated embodiment, PLL 2020 locks to the AC mains frequency (e.g., 50 or 60 HZ) and produces a high speed clock (CLK) signal and a synchronization signal (SYNC). The CLK signal provides the timing for control circuit 2035 and LED driver and receiver circuit 2040. In one example, the CLK signal frequency is in the tens of MHz range (e.g., 23 MHz), and is precisely synchronized to the AC Mains frequency and phase. The SYNC signal is used by the control circuit 2035 to create the timing of the intervals used for the detection and compensation measurements described above. In one example, the SYNC signal frequency is equal to the AC Mains frequency (e.g., 50 or 60 HZ) and also has a precise phase alignment with the AC Mains. In another embodiment, the SYNC signal frequency is an integral multiple of the AC mains frequency. In an embodiment, timing reference signal 1520 of FIG. 15 is an example of the SYNC signal of FIG. 20 .
In some embodiments, a wireless interface 2025 may be included and used to calibrate the illumination device 2000 during manufacturing. As discussed in the co-pending applications referenced herein, an external calibration tool (not shown in FIG. 20 ) may communicate calibration values (e.g., luminous flux, chromaticity and/or other optical measurement values) to an illumination device under test via the wireless interface 2025. The calibration values received via the wireless interface 2025 may be stored in the table of calibration values within a storage medium 2030 of the control circuit 2035, for example. In some embodiments, the control circuit 2035 may use the calibration values to generate calibration coefficients, which are stored within the storage medium 2030 in addition to, or in lieu of, the received calibration values.
In some embodiments, wireless interface 2025 could operate according to ZigBee, WiFi, Bluetooth, or any other proprietary or standard wireless data communication protocol. In other embodiments, wireless interface 2025 could communicate using radio frequency (RF), infrared (IR) light or visible light. In alternative embodiments, a wired interface could be used, in place of the wireless interface 2025 shown, to communicate information, data and/or commands over the AC mains or a dedicated conductor or set of conductors.
Using the timing signals received from PLL 2020, the control circuit 2035 calculates and produces values indicating the desired drive current to be used for each LED chain 2045. This information may be communicated from the control circuit 2035 to the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 over a serial bus conforming to a standard, such as SPI or I2C, for example. In addition, the control circuit 2035 may provide a latching signal that instructs the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 to simultaneously change the drive currents supplied to each of the LEDs 2045 to prevent brightness and color artifacts.
In some embodiments, the control circuit 2035 may determine the respective drive currents and perform the interference-related operations described herein by executing program instructions stored within the storage medium 2030. In one embodiment, the storage medium may be a non-volatile memory, and may be configured for storing the program instructions along with a table of calibration values used in the compensation methods and a data structure including configuration information such as that of FIG. 17 . Alternatively, the control circuit 2035 may include combinational logic for determining the desired drive currents or performing other operations, such that program instructions for determining drive currents are not stored on storage medium 2030. In a further embodiment, operations of control circuit 2035 may be carried out using a combination of program instructions and combinational logic. Storage medium 2030, along with other memory or storage described herein, includes a plurality of storage locations addressable by control circuit 2035 or a processor such as that associated with controller 2190 in FIG. 21 for storing software programs and data associated with the methods described herein. As such, storage medium 2030 and other memory or storage media described herein may be implemented using any combination of built-in volatile or non-volatile memory, including random-access memory (RAM) and read-only memory (ROM) and integrated or peripheral storage devices such as magnetic disks, optical disks, solid state drives or flash drives. In an embodiment, storage medium 2030 may be used to store one or more counters such as the collision counter, free interval counter, and contiguous free interval counters described in connection with FIGS. 16B and 16C above.
In general, the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 may include a number (N) of driver blocks 2115 equal to the number of emission LED chains 2045 included within the illumination device. In the exemplary embodiment discussed herein, LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 comprises four driver blocks 2115, each configured to produce illumination from a different one of the emission LED chains 2045. The LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 also comprises the circuitry needed to measure ambient temperature (optional), the detector and/or emitter forward voltages, and the detector photocurrents, and to adjust the LED drive currents accordingly. Each driver block 2115 receives data indicating a desired drive current from the control circuit 2035, along with a latching signal indicating when the driver block 2115 should change the drive current.
As shown in FIG. 21 , each driver block 2115 includes a difference amplifier 2140 for measuring the forward voltage drop (Vfe) across the chain of emission LEDs 2045a. When measuring Vfe, the buck converter 2120 is turned off and the current source 2125 is configured for drawing a relatively small drive current (e.g., about 1 mA) through the connected chain of emission LEDs 2045(a). The voltage drop (Vfe) produced across the LED chain 2045(a) by that current is measured by the difference amplifier 2140. The difference amplifier 2140 produces a signal that is equal to the forward voltage (Vfe) drop across the emission LED chain 2045(a) during forward voltage measurements.
As noted above, some embodiments of the invention may use one of the emission LEDs (e.g., a green emission LED), at times, as a photodetector. In such embodiments, the driver blocks 2115 may include additional circuitry for measuring the photocurrents (Iph_d2), which are induced across an emission LED, when the emission LED is configured for detecting incident light. For example, each driver block 2115 may include a transimpedance amplifier 2130, which generally functions to convert an input current to an output voltage proportional to a feedback resistance. As shown in FIG. 21 , the positive terminal of transimpedance amplifier 2130 is connected to the Vdr output of the buck converter 2120, while the negative terminal is connected to the cathode of the last LED in the LED chain 2045(a). Transimpedance amplifier 2130 is enabled when the “LED_On” signal is low. When the “LED_On” signal is high, the output of transimpedance amplifier 2130 is tri-stated.
When measuring the photocurrents (Iph_d2) induced by an emission LED, the buck converters 2120 connected to all other emission LEDs should be turned off to avoid visual artifacts produced by LED current transients. In addition, the buck converter 2120 coupled to the emission LED under test should also be turned off to prevent switching noise within the buck converter from interfering with the photocurrent measurements. Although turned off, the Vdr output of the buck converter 2120 coupled to the emission LED under test is held to a particular value (e.g., about 2-3.5 volts times the number of emission LEDs in the chain) by the capacitor within LC filter 2145. When this voltage (Vdr) is supplied to the anode of emission LED under test and the positive terminal of the transimpedance amplifier 2130, the transimpedance amplifier produces an output voltage (relative to Vdr) that is supplied to the positive terminal of difference amplifier 2135. Difference amplifier 2135 compares the output voltage of transimpedance amplifier 2130 to Vdr and generates a difference signal, which corresponds to the photocurrent (Iph_d2) induced across the LED chain 2045(a).
In addition to including a plurality of driver blocks 2115, the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 may include one or more receiver blocks 2150 for measuring the forward voltages (Vfd) and photocurrents (Iph_d1 or Iph_d2) induced across the one or more dedicated photodetectors 2050. Although only one receiver block 2150 is shown in FIG. 21 , the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 may generally include a number of receiver blocks 2150 equal to the number of dedicated photodetectors included within the emitter module.
In the illustrated embodiment, receiver block 2150 comprises a voltage source 2155, which is coupled for supplying a DC voltage (Vdr) to the anode of the dedicated photodetector 2050 coupled to the receiver block, while the cathode of the photodetector 2050 is connected to current source 2160. When photodetector 2050 is configured for obtaining forward voltage (Vfd), the controller 2190 supplies a “Detector_On” signal to the current source 2160, which forces a fixed drive current (Idrv) equal to the value provided by the “Detector Current” signal through photodetector 2050.
When obtaining detector forward voltage (Vfd) measurements, current source 2160 is configured for drawing a relatively small amount of drive current (Idrv) through photodetector 2050. The voltage drop (Vfd) produced across photodetector 2050 by that current is measured by difference amplifier 2175, which produces a signal equal to the forward voltage (Vfd) drop across photodetector 2050. As noted above, the drive current (Idrv) forced through photodetector 2050 by the current source 2160 is generally a relatively small, non-operative drive current. In the embodiment in which four dedicated photodetectors 2050 are coupled in parallel, the non-operative drive current may be roughly 1 mA. However, smaller/larger drive currents may be used in embodiments that include fewer/greater numbers of photodetectors, or embodiments that do not connect the photodetectors in parallel.
Similar to driver block 2115, receiver block 2150 also includes circuitry for measuring the photocurrents (Iph_d1 or Iph_d2) induced on photodetector 2050 by ambient light, as well as light emitted by the emission LEDs. As shown in FIG. 21 , the positive terminal of transimpedance amplifier 2165 is coupled to the Vdr output of voltage source 2155, while the negative terminal is connected to the cathode of photodetector 2050. When connected in this manner, the transimpedance amplifier 2165 produces an output voltage relative to Vdr (e.g., about 0-1V), which is supplied to the positive terminal of difference amplifier 2170. Difference amplifier 2170 compares the output voltage to Vdr and generates a difference signal, which corresponds to the photocurrent (Iph_d1 or Iph_d2) induced across photodetector 2050. Transimpedance amplifier 2165 is enabled when the “Detector_On” signal is low. When the “Detector_On” signal is high, the output of transimpedance amplifier 2165 is tri-stated.
As noted above, some embodiments of the invention may scatter the individual LEDs within each chain of LEDs 2045 about the array of LEDs, so that no two LEDs of the same color exist in any row, column or diagonal (see, e.g., FIG. 19B ). By connecting a plurality of dedicated photodetectors 2050 in parallel with the receiver block 2150, the photocurrents (Iph_d1 or Iph_d2) induced on each photodetector 2050 by the LEDs of a given color may be summed to minimize the spatial variation between the similarly colored LEDs, which are scattered about the array.
As shown in FIG. 21 , the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 may also include a multiplexor (Mux) 2180, an analog to digital converter (ADC) 2185, a controller 2190, and an optional temperature sensor 2195. In some embodiments, multiplexor 2180 may be coupled for receiving the emitter forward voltage (Vfe) and the (optional) photocurrent (Iph_d2) measurements from the driver blocks 2115, and the detector forward voltage (Vfd) and detector photocurrent (Iph_d1 and/or Iph_d2) measurements from the receiver block 2150. The ADC 2185 digitizes the emitter forward voltage (Vfe) and the optional photocurrent (Iph_d2) measurements output from the driver blocks 2115, and the detector forward voltage (Vfd) and detector photocurrent (Iph_d1 and/or Iph_d2) measurements output from the receiver block 2150, and provides the results to the controller 2190. The controller 2190 determines when to take forward voltage and photocurrent measurements and produces the Out_En, Emitter Current and Led_On signals, which are supplied to the driver blocks 2115, and the Detector Current and Detector_On signals, which are supplied to the receiver block 2150 as shown in FIG. 21 .
In some embodiments, the LED driver and receiver circuit 2040 may include an optional temperature sensor 2195 for taking ambient temperature (Ta) measurements. In such embodiments, multiplexor 2180 may also be coupled for multiplexing the ambient temperature (Ta) with the forward voltage and photocurrent measurements sent to the ADC 2185. In some embodiments, the temperature sensor 2195 may be a thermistor, and may be included on the driver circuit chip for measuring the ambient temperature surrounding the LEDs, or a temperature from the heat sink of the emitter module. If the optional temperature sensor 2195 is included, the output of the temperature sensor may be used in some embodiments to determine if a significant change in temperature is detected. In some embodiments detection of a significant change in temperature may cause compensation measurements to be initiated.
One implementation of an improved illumination device 2000 has now been described in reference to FIGS. 20-21 . Further description of such an illumination device may be found in commonly assigned U.S. application Ser. Nos. 13/970,944; 13/970,964; 13/970,990; and 14/097,339. A skilled artisan would understand how the illumination device could be alternatively implemented within the scope of the methods and devices described herein.
An exemplary block diagram of circuit components for an illumination device including multiple emitter modules is shown in FIG. 22 . In the embodiment of FIG. 22 , the circuit components are housed on a power supply board 2202 and emitter board 2204 which are dimensioned to fit within the housing of a linear illumination device. An external view of an embodiment of such a linear illumination device is shown in FIG. 18A . Emitter board 2204 in the embodiment of FIG. 22 includes 6 emitter modules 2212 arranged in a linear row. A representation of a top view of an exemplary embodiment of emitter module 2212 is shown in FIG. 18B .
In the embodiment of FIG. 22 , power supply board 2202 comprises AC/DC converter 2206 and controller 2208. AC/DC converter 2206 converters AC mains power to a DC voltage of typically 15-20V, which is then used to power controller 2208 and emitter board 2204. The DC voltage from AC/DC converter 2206 may be converted to lower voltages as well elsewhere within the illumination device. Controller 2208 communicates with emitter board 2204 through a digital control bus, in this example. Controller 2208 could comprise a wireless, power line, or any other type of communication interface to enable the color of the linear illumination device to be adjusted. In an embodiment, controller 2208 also provides to each of interface circuits 2210 a timing signal and an offset from the timing signal at which measurement intervals and/or detection intervals for the associated emitter module are to occur. In a further embodiment, adjacently positioned emitter modules within the illumination device are assigned different offsets from the timing reference, so that compensation measurements performed by adjacent emitter modules are performed using non-overlapping sets of intervals. In one such embodiment, an illumination device including six emitter modules such as that illustrated in FIG. 22 uses three different offsets from a timing reference: a first offset for the first and fourth emitter modules (counting from one end of the device), a second offset for the second and fifth emitter modules, and a third offset for the third and sixth emitter modules. In alternative embodiments a different number of offsets may be used, including the use of a different offset for each individual emitter module.
In the illustrated embodiment, emitter board 2204 comprises six emitter modules 2212 and six interface circuits 2210. Interface circuits 2210 communicate with controller 2208 over the digital control bus and produce the drive currents supplied to the LEDs within the emitter modules 2212. FIG. 23 illustrates exemplary circuitry that may be included within interface circuitry 2210 and emitter modules 2212. Interface circuitry 2210 comprises control logic 2302, LED drivers 2304, and receiver 2306. Emitter module 2212 comprises emission LEDs 2308 and a detector 2310. Control logic 2302 may comprise a microcontroller or special logic, and communicates with controller 2208 over the digital control bus. Control logic 2302 also sets the drive current produced by LED drivers 2304 to adjust the color and/or intensity of the light produced by emission LEDs 2308, and manages receiver 2306 to monitor the light produced by each individual LED 2308 via detector 2310. In some embodiments, control logic 2302 may comprise memory for storing calibration information necessary for maintaining precise color, or alternatively, such information could be stored in controller 2208. Similarly, other information used in performing the methods described herein is in some embodiments stored in memory locations within control logic 2302, within controller 2208, or distributed between both of these circuits. Such other information may include configuration information such as that discussed in connection with FIG. 17 above.
In an embodiment, the circuit components on power supply board 2202 are implemented in a similar manner as the power supply and control circuitry shown in FIG. 20 , including AC/DC converter 2010, DC/DC converter 2015, PLL 2020, wireless interface 2025, and control circuit 2035. Similarly, interface circuit 2210 is in some embodiments implemented in a manner similar to driver and receiver circuit 2040 shown in FIGS. 20-21 . LEDs 2308 and detector 2310 are in some embodiments implemented using LED chains 2045 and detectors 2050 of FIG. 20 , respectively. Functions of control circuit 2035 in FIG. 20 may in some embodiments be distributed between control logic 2302 of FIG. 23 and controller 2208 of FIG. 22 . In some embodiments, certain functions of control circuit 2035 may be duplicated in both controller 2208 and control logic 2302. Controller 2208 may also be referred to as a device control circuit herein. In an embodiment, the device control circuit is configured to control the entire illumination device. Control logic 2302 may also be referred to herein as a module control circuit for its respective emitter module 2212. In an embodiment, the module control circuit is configured to control functionality of its respective emitter module, including performance of compensation measurements and adjustment of illumination settings. Certain functions of the module control circuits may in some embodiments be performed by the device control circuit 2208.
One implementation of an improved illumination device has now been described in reference to FIGS. 22-23 . Further description of such an illumination device may be found in commonly assigned U.S. application Ser. Nos. 13/970,944; 13/970,964; 13/970,990; and 14/097,339. A skilled artisan would understand how the illumination device could be alternatively implemented within the scope of the methods and devices described herein.
It will be appreciated to those skilled in the art having the benefit of this disclosure that this invention is believed to provide an improved illumination device and methods for avoiding interference-related errors when compensating individual LEDs in the illumination device for variations in quantities such as drive current and temperature. Further modifications and alternative embodiments of various aspects of the invention will be apparent to those skilled in the art in view of this description. It is intended, therefore, that the following claims be interpreted to embrace all such modifications and changes and, accordingly, the specification and drawings are to be regarded in an illustrative rather than a restrictive sense.
Claims (33)
1. A method for controlling an illumination device comprising multiple emission light emitting diode (LED) elements, the method comprising:
operating one or more of the multiple emission LED elements to produce illumination substantially continuously by supplying a respective drive current at an operative drive current level to each of the one or more of the multiple emission LED elements;
bringing the respective drive current of all except one of the emission LED elements within the illumination device to a non-operative drive current level, which is insufficient to produce illumination, for the a duration of a first measurement interval, wherein the first measurement interval is one of a first series of measurement intervals interspersed with periods of said illumination; and
bringing the respective drive current of all except one of the emission LED elements to a non-operative drive current level, which is insufficient to produce illumination, for the a duration of a second measurement interval subsequent to the first measurement interval, wherein the second measurement interval is one of a second series of measurement intervals interspersed with periods of said illumination, and wherein the first series of measurement intervals and second series of measurement intervals are separated by respective first and second offsets from a timing reference.
2. The method of claim 1 , further comprising, at a time subsequent to the end of the first measurement interval, discontinuing use of the first series of measurement intervals.
3. The method of claim 1 , further comprising:
during each of said first measurement interval and said second measurement interval, applying a drive current at an operative drive current level, which is sufficient to produce illumination, to the one of the emission LED elements; and
monitoring a measurement photocurrent induced in a measurement photodetector during said applying a drive current.
4. The method of claim 3 , further comprising determining whether a result of said monitoring a measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of an expected range.
5. The method of claim 4 , wherein said bringing the respective drive current of all except one of the emission LED elements to a non-operative drive current level which is insufficient to produce illumination, for the duration of a second measurement interval is in response to a determination that the result of said monitoring a measurement photocurrent is outside of the expected range.
6. The method of claim 4 , further comprising, in response to a determination that the result of said monitoring a measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of the expected range:
repeating, during an additional one of the first series of measurement intervals, said applying a drive current at an operative drive current level, which is sufficient to produce illumination, to the one of the emission LED elements and said monitoring a measurement photocurrent induced in the measurement photodetector; and
determining whether a predetermined number of out-of-range measurements using the first series of measurement intervals has occurred.
7. The method of claim 6 , wherein said bringing the respective drive current of all except one of the emission LED elements to a non-operative drive current level, which is insufficient to produce illumination, for the duration of a second measurement interval is in response to a determination that the predetermined number of out-of-range measurements using the first series of measurement intervals has occurred.
8. The method of claim 4 , further comprising, for each of the first and second measurement intervals:
bringing the drive current applied to the one of the emission LED elements to a non-operative drive current level, which is insufficient to produce illumination, for a portion of the measurement interval, such that the respective drive currents of all of the emission LED elements within the illumination device are at a non-operative drive current level for the portion of the measurement interval;
monitoring a background photocurrent induced in the measurement photodetector during the portion of the measurement interval; and
subtracting the background photocurrent from the measurement photocurrent.
9. The method of claim 8 , wherein the result of said monitoring a measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval comprises a result of said subtracting the background photocurrent from the measurement photocurrent for the first measurement interval.
10. The method of claim 4 , wherein said determining that a result of said monitoring a measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of an expected range comprises comparing the result to a previously stored result.
11. An illumination device, comprising:
multiple emission light emitting diode (LED) elements;
one or more photodetectors; and
a control circuit operably coupled to the multiple emission LED elements and the one or more photodetectors, wherein the control circuit is adapted to:
operate one or more of the multiple emission LED elements to produce illumination substantially continuously by supplying a respective drive current at an operative drive current level to each of the one or more of the multiple emission LED elements;
bring the respective drive currents of all except one of the emission LED elements within the illumination device to a non-operative drive current level, which is insufficient to produce illumination for the a duration of a first measurement interval, wherein the first measurement interval is one of a first series of measurement intervals interspersed with periods of said illumination; and
bring the respective drive currents of all except one of the emission LED elements to a non-operative drive current level, which is insufficient to produce illumination, for the a duration of a second measurement interval subsequent to the first measurement interval, wherein the second measurement interval is one of a second series of measurement intervals interspersed with periods of said illumination, and wherein the first series of measurement intervals and second series of measurement intervals are separated by respective first and second offsets from a timing reference.
12. The illumination device of claim 11 , further comprising a timing reference generator operatively coupled to the control circuit and adapted to generate a periodic timing reference, and wherein the control circuit is further adapted to:
generate the first series of measurement intervals synchronized to the timing reference with a first offset from the timing reference; and
generate the second series of measurement intervals synchronized to the timing reference with a second offset from the timing reference.
13. The illumination device of claim 11 , wherein the control circuit is further adapted to discontinue use of the first series of measurement intervals at a time subsequent to the end of the first measurement interval.
14. The illumination device of claim 11 , further comprising an LED driver and receiver circuit operably coupled to the multiple emission LED elements, the one or more photodetectors, and the control circuit, and wherein the control circuit is adapted to use the LED driver and receiver circuit to adjust the respective drive currents of the emission LED elements.
15. The illumination device of claim 14 , wherein, during each of said first measurement interval and said second measurement interval, the control circuit is further adapted to use the LED driver and receiver circuit to:
bring the respective drive currents of all except one of the emission LED elements to a non-operative drive current level, which is insufficient to produce illumination;
apply a drive current to an operative drive current level, which is sufficient to produce illumination, to the one of the emission LED elements; and
monitor a measurement photocurrent induced in the measurement photodetector during said applying a drive current.
16. The illumination device of claim 15 , wherein the control circuit is further adapted to determine whether a result of monitoring the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of an expected range.
17. The illumination device of claim 16 , further comprising a storage medium operably coupled to the control circuit, and wherein the control circuit is adapted to compare the result of monitoring the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval with a result previously stored in the storage medium.
18. The illumination device of claim 16 , wherein the control circuit is further adapted to bring the respective drive currents of all except one of the emission LED elements to a non-operative drive current level, which is insufficient to produce illumination, for the duration of the second measurement interval in response to a determination that the result is outside of the expected range.
19. The illumination device of claim 16 , wherein the control circuit is further adapted to determine whether a predetermined number of out-of-range measurements using the first series of measurement intervals has occurred.
20. The illumination device of claim 16 , wherein, for each of the first and second measurement intervals, the control circuit is further adapted to:
bring the drive current applied to the one of the emission LED elements to a non-operative drive current level, which is insufficient to produce illumination, for a portion of the measurement interval, such that the respective drive currents of all of the emission LED elements within the illumination device are at a non-operative drive current level for the portion of the measurement interval;
monitor a background photocurrent induced in the measurement photodetector during the portion of the measurement interval; and
subtract the background photocurrent from the measurement photocurrent.
21. The illumination device of claim 20 , wherein the control circuit is further adapted to determine whether a result of subtracting the background photocurrent from the measurement photocurrent during the first measurement interval is outside of an expected range.
22. A method for controlling an illumination device comprising a first light emitting diode (LED) element and a second LED element, the method comprising:
supplying a respective operative drive current to each of the first LED element and the second LED element to produce illumination;
performing a first measurement that comprises measuring a first photocurrent induced in at least one photodetector while supplying a respective non-operative drive current to each of the first LED element and the second LED element;
at an end of the first measurement, supplying a respective operative drive current to each of the first LED element and the second LED element to produce illumination;
based at least in part on the first photocurrent, determining that a non-constant illumination is detected;
based at least in part on determining that a non-constant illumination is detected:
waiting a delay time; and
at an end of the delay time, performing a second measurement that comprises measuring a second photocurrent induced in the least one photodetector while supplying a respective non-operative drive current to each of the first LED element and the second LED element;
at an end of the second measurement, supplying a respective operative drive current to each of the first LED element and the second LED element to produce illumination;
based at least in part on the second photocurrent, determining that no non-constant illumination is detected;
based at least in part on determining that no non-constant illumination is detected, performing a subsequent measurement that comprises:
measuring a first photocurrent induced in the at least one photodetector while supplying an operative drive current to the first LED element to produce illumination and supplying a non-operative drive current to the second LED element; and
measuring a second photocurrent induced in the at least one photodetector while supplying a respective non-operative drive current to each of the first LED element and the second LED element;
based at least in part on the subsequent measurement of the first photocurrent and the second photocurrent,
obtaining a corrected photocurrent; and
at an end of the subsequent measurement, supplying to the first LED element an operative drive current that is determined based at least in part on the corrected photocurrent.
23. The method of claim 22, wherein the delay time comprises a randomized delay time.
24. The method of claim 22, further comprising:
performing a plurality of consecutive measurements and determining from the plurality of measurements that no non-constant illumination is detected; and
wherein performing the subsequent measurement comprises performing the subsequent measurement based at least in part on determining from the plurality of measurements that no non-constant illumination is detected.
25. An illumination device comprising:
a first light emitting diode (LED) element and a second LED element; and
a control circuit operably coupled to the first and the second LED elements, wherein the control circuit is adapted to:
supply a respective operative drive current to each of the first LED element and the second LED element to produce illumination;
perform a first measurement, wherein to perform the first measurement comprises to measure a first photocurrent induced in at least one photodetector while supplying a respective non-operative drive current to each of the first LED element and the second LED element;
at an end of the first measurement, supply a respective operative drive current to each of the first LED element and the second LED element to produce illumination;
based at least in part on the first photocurrent, determine that a non-constant illumination is detected;
based at least in part on determining that a non-constant illumination is detected:
wait a delay time; and
at an end of the delay time, perform a second measurement, wherein to perform the second measurement comprises to measure a second photocurrent induced in the least one photodetector while supplying a respective non-operative drive current to each of the first LED element and the second LED element;
at an end of the second measurement, supply a respective operative drive current to each of the first LED element and the second LED element to produce illumination;
based at least in part on the second photocurrent, determine that no non-constant illumination is detected;
based at least in part on determining that no non-constant illumination is detected, perform a subsequent measurement, wherein to perform the subsequent measurement comprises to:
measure a first photocurrent induced in the at least one photodetector while supplying an operative drive current to the first LED element to produce illumination and supplying a non-operative drive current to the second LED element; and
measure a second photocurrent induced in the least one photodetector while supplying a respective non-operative drive current to each of the first LED element and the second LED element;
based at least in part on the subsequent measurement of the first photocurrent and the second photocurrent, obtain a corrected photocurrent; and
at an end of the subsequent measurement, supply to the first LED element an operative drive current that is determined based at least in part on the corrected photocurrent.
26. The illumination device of claim 25, wherein the delay time comprises a randomized delay time.
27. The illumination device of claim 25, wherein the control circuit is further adapted to:
perform a plurality of consecutive measurements and determine from the plurality of measurements that no non-constant illumination is detected: and
wherein to perform the subsequent measuremement comprises to perform the subsequent measurement based at least in part on determining from the plurality of measurements that no non-constant illumination is detected.
28. The method of claim 22,
wherein the first, second, and subsequent measurements are part of a first series of measurement intervals; and
wherein the method further comprises:
performing a plurality of measurements and determining from the plurality of measurements that non-constant illumination is detected; and
changing to a second series of measurement intervals based on determining that non-constant illumination is detected, wherein the first series of measurement intervals and the second series of measurement intervals are separated from a timing reference by different offset times.
29. The method of claim 28, wherein the method further comprises:
performing, during the second series of measurement intervals, a plurality of measurements to determine whether non-constant illumination is detected.
30. The method of claim 22, further comprising:
based at least in part on determining that no non-constant illumination is detected,
measuring a first photocurrent induced in the at least one photodetector while supplying an operative drive current to the second LED element to produce illumination and supplying a non-operative drive current to the first LED element; and
measuring a second photocurrent induced in the least one photodetector while supplying a respective non-operative drive current to each of the first LED element and the second LED element;
based at least in part on the first photocurrent and the second photocurrent, measured as a result of determining that no non-constant illumination is detected, obtaining another corrected photocurrent; and
supplying to the second LED element an operative drive current that is determined based at least in part on the another corrected photocurrent.
31. The illumination device of claim 25,
wherein the control circuit is adapted to perform the first, second, and subsequent measurements as part of a first series of measurement intervals; and
wherein the control circuit is further adapted to:
perform a plurality of measurements and determine from the plurality of measurements that non-constant illumination is detected; and
change to a second series of measurement intervals based on determining that non-constant illumination is detected, wherein the first series of measurement intervals and the second series of measurement intervals are separated from a timing reference by different offset times.
32. The illumination device of claim 31, wherein the control circuit is further adapted to perform, during the second series of measurement intervals, a plurality of measurements to determine whether non-constant illumination is detected.
33. The illumination device of claim 25, wherein the control circuit is further adapted to:
based at least in part on determining that no non-constant illumination is detected,
measure a first photocurrent induced in the at least one photodetector while supplying an operative drive current to the second LED element to produce illumination and supplying a non-operative drive current to the first LED element; and
measure a second photocurrent induced in the at least one photodetector while supplying a respective non-operative drive current to each of the first LED element and the second LED element;
based at least in part on the first photocurrent and the second photocurrent, measured as a result of determining that no non-constant illumination is detected, obtain another corrected photocurrent; and
supply to the second LED element an operative drive current that is determined based at least in part on the another corrected photocurrent.
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US15/982,681 USRE48956E1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2018-05-17 | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals |
US17/087,562 USRE49705E1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2020-11-02 | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals |
Applications Claiming Priority (5)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US13/970,990 US9578724B1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2013-08-20 | Illumination device and method for avoiding flicker |
US14/097,339 US9360174B2 (en) | 2013-12-05 | 2013-12-05 | Linear LED illumination device with improved color mixing |
US14/314,530 US9769899B2 (en) | 2014-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Illumination device and age compensation method |
US14/510,266 US9345097B1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2014-10-09 | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals |
US15/982,681 USRE48956E1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2018-05-17 | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US14/510,266 Reissue US9345097B1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2014-10-09 | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US14/510,266 Continuation US9345097B1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2014-10-09 | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
USRE48956E1 true USRE48956E1 (en) | 2022-03-01 |
Family
ID=80351150
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/982,681 Active USRE48956E1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2018-05-17 | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals |
US17/087,562 Active USRE49705E1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2020-11-02 | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals |
Family Applications After (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US17/087,562 Active USRE49705E1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2020-11-02 | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | USRE48956E1 (en) |
Citations (304)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4029976A (en) | 1976-04-23 | 1977-06-14 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy | Amplifier for fiber optics application |
US4402090A (en) | 1980-12-23 | 1983-08-30 | International Business Machines Corp. | Communication system in which data are transferred between terminal stations and satellite stations by infrared signals |
EP0196347A1 (en) | 1985-04-02 | 1986-10-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Infrared communication system |
US4713841A (en) | 1985-06-03 | 1987-12-15 | Itt Electro Optical Products, A Division Of Itt Corporation | Synchronous, asynchronous, data rate transparent fiber optic communications link |
US4745402A (en) | 1987-02-19 | 1988-05-17 | Rca Licensing Corporation | Input device for a display system using phase-encoded signals |
US4744672A (en) | 1980-03-11 | 1988-05-17 | Semikron Gesellschaft fur Gleichrichterbau und Elektronik mbH | Semiconductor arrangement |
US4809359A (en) | 1986-12-24 | 1989-02-28 | Dockery Devan T | System for extending the effective operational range of an infrared remote control system |
US5018057A (en) | 1990-01-17 | 1991-05-21 | Lamp Technologies, Inc. | Touch initiated light module |
EP0456462A2 (en) | 1990-05-09 | 1991-11-13 | Michael William Smith | Electronic display device, display setting apparatus and display system |
US5103466A (en) | 1990-03-26 | 1992-04-07 | Intel Corporation | CMOS digital clock and data recovery circuit |
US5181015A (en) | 1989-11-07 | 1993-01-19 | Proxima Corporation | Method and apparatus for calibrating an optical computer input system |
US5193201A (en) | 1990-04-23 | 1993-03-09 | Tymes Laroy | System for converting a received modulated light into both power for the system and image data displayed by the system |
US5218356A (en) | 1991-05-31 | 1993-06-08 | Guenther Knapp | Wireless indoor data relay system |
US5299046A (en) | 1989-03-17 | 1994-03-29 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Self-sufficient photon-driven component |
US5317441A (en) | 1991-10-21 | 1994-05-31 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Transceiver for full duplex signalling on a fiber optic cable |
JPH06302384A (en) | 1993-04-15 | 1994-10-28 | Matsushita Electric Works Ltd | Remote control lighting system |
EP0677983A2 (en) | 1994-04-13 | 1995-10-18 | General Electric Company | Gas discharge lamp ballast circuit with automatically calibrated light feedback control |
US5541759A (en) | 1995-05-09 | 1996-07-30 | Microsym Computers, Inc. | Single fiber transceiver and network |
JPH08201472A (en) | 1995-01-27 | 1996-08-09 | Stanley Electric Co Ltd | Method for detecting lifetime of led signal lamp |
US5619262A (en) | 1994-11-18 | 1997-04-08 | Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. | Solid-state image pickup apparatus including a unit cell array |
GB2307577A (en) | 1995-10-31 | 1997-05-28 | Anthony Michael David Marvin | Communication system |
US5657145A (en) | 1993-10-19 | 1997-08-12 | Bsc Developments Ltd. | Modulation and coding for transmission using fluorescent tubes |
US5797085A (en) | 1995-04-28 | 1998-08-18 | U.S. Phillips Corporation | Wireless communication system for reliable communication between a group of apparatuses |
JPH1125822A (en) | 1997-06-30 | 1999-01-29 | Matsushita Electric Works Ltd | Wall switch |
US5905445A (en) | 1997-05-05 | 1999-05-18 | Delco Electronics Corp. | Keyless entry system with fast program mode |
US6016038A (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2000-01-18 | Color Kinetics, Inc. | Multicolored LED lighting method and apparatus |
US6067595A (en) | 1997-09-23 | 2000-05-23 | Icore Technologies, Inc. | Method and apparatus for enabling high-performance intelligent I/O subsystems using multi-port memories |
US6069929A (en) | 1991-04-26 | 2000-05-30 | Fujitsu Limited | Wireless communication system compulsively turning remote terminals into inactive state |
WO2000037904A1 (en) | 1998-12-18 | 2000-06-29 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Led luminaire |
US6084231A (en) | 1997-12-22 | 2000-07-04 | Popat; Pradeep P. | Closed-loop, daylight-sensing, automatic window-covering system insensitive to radiant spectrum produced by gaseous-discharge lamps |
US6094014A (en) | 1997-08-01 | 2000-07-25 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Circuit arrangement, and signaling light provided with the circuit arrangement |
US6094340A (en) | 1997-05-27 | 2000-07-25 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus of coupling liquid crystal panel for liquid crystal display |
US6108114A (en) | 1998-01-22 | 2000-08-22 | Methode Electronics, Inc. | Optoelectronic transmitter having an improved power control circuit for rapidly enabling a semiconductor laser |
US6147458A (en) | 1998-07-01 | 2000-11-14 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Circuit arrangement and signalling light provided with the circuit arrangement |
US6234645B1 (en) | 1998-09-28 | 2001-05-22 | U.S. Philips Cororation | LED lighting system for producing white light |
US6234648B1 (en) | 1998-09-28 | 2001-05-22 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Lighting system |
US6250774B1 (en) | 1997-01-23 | 2001-06-26 | U.S. Philips Corp. | Luminaire |
US20010020123A1 (en) | 1995-06-07 | 2001-09-06 | Mohamed Kheir Diab | Manual and automatic probe calibration |
US20010030668A1 (en) | 2000-01-10 | 2001-10-18 | Gamze Erten | Method and system for interacting with a display |
US6333605B1 (en) | 1999-11-02 | 2001-12-25 | Energy Savings, Inc. | Light modulating electronic ballast |
US6344641B1 (en) | 1999-08-11 | 2002-02-05 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | System and method for on-chip calibration of illumination sources for an integrated circuit display |
US20020014643A1 (en) | 2000-05-30 | 2002-02-07 | Masaru Kubo | Circuit-incorporating photosensitve device |
US6356774B1 (en) | 1998-09-29 | 2002-03-12 | Mallinckrodt, Inc. | Oximeter sensor with encoded temperature characteristic |
US6359712B1 (en) | 1998-02-23 | 2002-03-19 | Taiyo Yuden Co., Ltd. | Bidirectional optical communication apparatus and optical remote control apparatus |
US20020033981A1 (en) | 2000-09-20 | 2002-03-21 | Keller Robert C. | Optical wireless multiport hub |
US20020047624A1 (en) | 2000-03-27 | 2002-04-25 | Stam Joseph S. | Lamp assembly incorporating optical feedback |
US20020049933A1 (en) | 2000-10-24 | 2002-04-25 | Takayuki Nyu | Network device and method for detecting a link failure which would cause network to remain in a persistent state |
US6384545B1 (en) | 2001-03-19 | 2002-05-07 | Ee Theow Lau | Lighting controller |
US6396815B1 (en) | 1997-02-18 | 2002-05-28 | Virata Limited | Proxy-controlled ATM subnetwork |
US6414661B1 (en) | 2000-02-22 | 2002-07-02 | Sarnoff Corporation | Method and apparatus for calibrating display devices and automatically compensating for loss in their efficiency over time |
US6441558B1 (en) | 2000-12-07 | 2002-08-27 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | White LED luminary light control system |
US6448550B1 (en) | 2000-04-27 | 2002-09-10 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Method and apparatus for measuring spectral content of LED light source and control thereof |
US20020138850A1 (en) | 2000-03-30 | 2002-09-26 | Coaxmedia, Inc. | Data scrambling system for a shared transmission media |
US20020134908A1 (en) | 2001-01-24 | 2002-09-26 | Applied Optoelectronics, Inc. | Method for determining photodiode performance parameters |
US20020171608A1 (en) | 2001-05-07 | 2002-11-21 | Izumi Kanai | Image display apparatus for forming an image with a plurality of luminescent points |
US6495964B1 (en) | 1998-12-18 | 2002-12-17 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LED luminaire with electrically adjusted color balance using photodetector |
US6513949B1 (en) | 1999-12-02 | 2003-02-04 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LED/phosphor-LED hybrid lighting systems |
US20030103413A1 (en) | 2001-11-30 | 2003-06-05 | Jacobi James J. | Portable universal interface device |
US6577512B2 (en) | 2001-05-25 | 2003-06-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Power supply for LEDs |
US20030122749A1 (en) | 2001-12-31 | 2003-07-03 | Booth Lawrence A. | Energy sensing light emitting diode display |
US20030133491A1 (en) | 2002-01-04 | 2003-07-17 | Kelvin Shih | LED junction temperature tester |
US6617795B2 (en) | 2001-07-26 | 2003-09-09 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Multichip LED package with in-package quantitative and spectral sensing capability and digital signal output |
WO2003075617A1 (en) | 2002-03-01 | 2003-09-12 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Light emitting device and display unit using the light emitting device and reading device |
US20030179721A1 (en) | 2002-03-21 | 2003-09-25 | Neal Shurmantine | Message control protocol in a communications network having repeaters |
US6636003B2 (en) | 2000-09-06 | 2003-10-21 | Spectrum Kinetics | Apparatus and method for adjusting the color temperature of white semiconduct or light emitters |
US6639574B2 (en) | 2002-01-09 | 2003-10-28 | Landmark Screens Llc | Light-emitting diode display |
US6664744B2 (en) | 2002-04-03 | 2003-12-16 | Mitsubishi Electric Research Laboratories, Inc. | Automatic backlight for handheld devices |
US20040044709A1 (en) | 2002-09-03 | 2004-03-04 | Florencio Cabrera | System and method for optical data communication |
US20040052299A1 (en) | 2002-07-29 | 2004-03-18 | Jay Paul R. | Temperature correction calibration system and method for optical controllers |
US20040052076A1 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2004-03-18 | Mueller George G. | Controlled lighting methods and apparatus |
US6741351B2 (en) | 2001-06-07 | 2004-05-25 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LED luminaire with light sensor configurations for optical feedback |
US20040101312A1 (en) | 2002-08-29 | 2004-05-27 | Florencio Cabrera | AC power source light modulation network |
US6753661B2 (en) | 2002-06-17 | 2004-06-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LED-based white-light backlighting for electronic displays |
US20040136682A1 (en) | 2002-12-24 | 2004-07-15 | Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha | Electronic device having multiple LEDs |
US6788011B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2004-09-07 | Color Kinetics, Incorporated | Multicolored LED lighting method and apparatus |
US20040201793A1 (en) | 2003-04-08 | 2004-10-14 | Organic Lighting Technologies Llc | Automatic background color change of a monochrome liquid crystal display |
US20040220922A1 (en) | 2003-04-30 | 2004-11-04 | Lovison Sean R. | Systems and methods for meeting people via wireless communication among a plurality of wireless devices |
JP2004325643A (en) | 2003-04-23 | 2004-11-18 | Seiko Epson Corp | Projector and optical apparatus |
US6831626B2 (en) | 2000-05-25 | 2004-12-14 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Temperature detecting circuit and liquid crystal driving device using same |
US6831569B2 (en) | 2001-03-08 | 2004-12-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and system for assigning and binding a network address of a ballast |
US20040257311A1 (en) | 2003-06-20 | 2004-12-23 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image display apparatus |
US20050004727A1 (en) | 2003-06-12 | 2005-01-06 | Donald Remboski | Vehicle network and communication method in a vehicle network |
US6853150B2 (en) | 2001-12-28 | 2005-02-08 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light emitting diode driver |
US20050030267A1 (en) | 2003-08-07 | 2005-02-10 | Gino Tanghe | Method and system for measuring and controlling an OLED display element for improved lifetime and light output |
US20050030203A1 (en) | 2000-08-29 | 2005-02-10 | Sharp Frank M. | Traffic signal light having ambient light detection |
US20050053378A1 (en) | 2003-09-05 | 2005-03-10 | Speakercraft, Inc. | Interference resistant repeater systems including controller units |
CN1596054A (en) | 2003-09-12 | 2005-03-16 | 罗姆股份有限公司 | Light emission control circuit |
WO2005024898A2 (en) | 2003-09-09 | 2005-03-17 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Integrated lamp with feedback and wireless control |
US6879263B2 (en) | 2000-11-15 | 2005-04-12 | Federal Law Enforcement, Inc. | LED warning light and communication system |
US20050077838A1 (en) | 2001-11-26 | 2005-04-14 | Simon Blumel | Circuit for an led array |
US20050110777A1 (en) | 2003-11-25 | 2005-05-26 | Geaghan Bernard O. | Light-emitting stylus and user input device using same |
US20050169643A1 (en) | 1997-01-02 | 2005-08-04 | Franklin Philip G. | Method and apparatus for the zonal transmission of data using building lighting fixtures |
US20050200292A1 (en) | 2004-02-24 | 2005-09-15 | Naugler W. E.Jr. | Emissive display device having sensing for luminance stabilization and user light or touch screen input |
US20050207157A1 (en) | 2003-12-18 | 2005-09-22 | Olympus Corporation | Illumination apparatus and display apparatus using the illumination apparatus |
US20050242742A1 (en) | 2004-04-30 | 2005-11-03 | Cheang Tak M | Light emitting diode based light system with a redundant light source |
US6965205B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2005-11-15 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Light emitting diode based products |
US6969954B2 (en) | 2000-08-07 | 2005-11-29 | Color Kinetics, Inc. | Automatic configuration systems and methods for lighting and other applications |
US20050265731A1 (en) | 2004-05-28 | 2005-12-01 | Samsung Electronics Co.; Ltd | Wireless terminal for carrying out visible light short-range communication using camera device |
US6975079B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2005-12-13 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Systems and methods for controlling illumination sources |
US7006768B1 (en) | 1997-01-02 | 2006-02-28 | Franklin Philip G | Method and apparatus for the zonal transmission of data using building lighting fixtures |
US7014336B1 (en) | 1999-11-18 | 2006-03-21 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Systems and methods for generating and modulating illumination conditions |
US20060061288A1 (en) | 2002-12-20 | 2006-03-23 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Sensing light emitted from multiple light sources |
US7038399B2 (en) | 2001-03-13 | 2006-05-02 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for providing power to lighting devices |
US20060145887A1 (en) | 2003-08-12 | 2006-07-06 | Overhead Door Corporation | Device including light emitting diode as light sensor and light source |
US20060164291A1 (en) | 2003-03-10 | 2006-07-27 | Staffan Gunnarsson | System for identification using a transponder powered by solar cells |
US7088031B2 (en) | 2003-04-22 | 2006-08-08 | Infinite Power Solutions, Inc. | Method and apparatus for an ambient energy battery or capacitor recharge system |
CN1830096A (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2006-09-06 | 日亚化学工业株式会社 | Light-emitting apparatus, led illumination, led light-emitting apparatus, and method of controlling light-emitting apparatus |
US20060198463A1 (en) | 2004-12-30 | 2006-09-07 | Alcatel | Device for converting a transmitted signal into a digital signal |
JP2006260927A (en) | 2005-03-17 | 2006-09-28 | Sony Corp | Illumination device, manufacturing method of the same, and display device |
US20060220990A1 (en) | 2005-04-05 | 2006-10-05 | Osram Sylvania Inc. | Three color LED bulb |
US7119500B2 (en) | 2003-12-05 | 2006-10-10 | Dialight Corporation | Dynamic color mixing LED device |
US20060227085A1 (en) | 2003-04-25 | 2006-10-12 | Boldt Norton K Jr | Led illumination source/display with individual led brightness monitoring capability and calibration method |
WO2007004108A1 (en) | 2005-06-30 | 2007-01-11 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and system for controlling the output of a luminaire |
US7166966B2 (en) | 2004-02-24 | 2007-01-23 | Nuelight Corporation | Penlight and touch screen data input system and method for flat panel displays |
US20070040512A1 (en) | 2005-08-17 | 2007-02-22 | Tir Systems Ltd. | Digitally controlled luminaire system |
US7194209B1 (en) | 2002-09-04 | 2007-03-20 | Xantech Corporation | Interference resistant infrared extension system |
US20070109239A1 (en) | 2005-11-14 | 2007-05-17 | Den Boer Willem | Integrated light sensitive liquid crystal display |
US20070132592A1 (en) | 2005-12-08 | 2007-06-14 | Palo Alto Research Center Incorporated | Electromagnetic tags |
US7233831B2 (en) | 1999-07-14 | 2007-06-19 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Systems and methods for controlling programmable lighting systems |
US7233115B2 (en) | 2004-03-15 | 2007-06-19 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | LED-based lighting network power control methods and apparatus |
WO2007069149A1 (en) | 2005-12-16 | 2007-06-21 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Illumination device and method for controlling an illumination device |
US20070139957A1 (en) | 2005-12-21 | 2007-06-21 | Honeywell International, Inc. | LED backlight system for LCD displays |
US7252408B2 (en) | 2004-07-19 | 2007-08-07 | Lamina Ceramics, Inc. | LED array package with internal feedback and control |
US7255458B2 (en) | 2003-07-22 | 2007-08-14 | Tir Systems, Ltd. | System and method for the diffusion of illumination produced by discrete light sources |
US7262559B2 (en) | 2002-12-19 | 2007-08-28 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LEDS driver |
JP2007266974A (en) | 2006-03-28 | 2007-10-11 | Sony Corp | Optical communication system, optical id reader, and information reading method |
JP2007267037A (en) | 2006-03-28 | 2007-10-11 | Matsushita Electric Works Ltd | Illumination light transmission system |
US20070248180A1 (en) | 2006-04-19 | 2007-10-25 | Wherenet Corp., Corporation Of The State Of California | Receiver for object locating and tracking systems and related methods |
US20070254694A1 (en) | 2004-02-02 | 2007-11-01 | Nakagawa Laboratories, Inc. | Camera-Equipped Cellular Terminal for Visible Light Communication |
US7294816B2 (en) | 2003-12-19 | 2007-11-13 | Avago Technologies Ecbu Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | LED illumination system having an intensity monitoring system |
CN101083866A (en) | 2006-05-30 | 2007-12-05 | 索尼株式会社 | Illumination system and liquid crystal display |
US20070279346A1 (en) | 2002-02-20 | 2007-12-06 | Planar Systems, Inc. | Display with embedded image sensor |
US20070284994A1 (en) | 2006-05-29 | 2007-12-13 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Light emitting apparatus, display apparatus and method for controlling light emitting apparatus |
US7315139B1 (en) | 2006-11-30 | 2008-01-01 | Avago Technologis Ecbu Ip (Singapore) Pte Ltd | Light source having more than three LEDs in which the color points are maintained using a three channel color sensor |
US7329998B2 (en) | 2004-08-06 | 2008-02-12 | Tir Systems Ltd. | Lighting system including photonic emission and detection using light-emitting elements |
US7330662B2 (en) | 2001-02-01 | 2008-02-12 | International Business Machines Corporation | System and method for remote optical digital networking of computing devices |
US7330002B2 (en) | 2005-09-09 | 2008-02-12 | Samsung Electro-Mechanics Co., Ltd. | Circuit for controlling LED with temperature compensation |
US20080061717A1 (en) | 2004-09-30 | 2008-03-13 | Osram Opto Semiconductors Gmbh | Led Array |
CN101150904A (en) | 2006-09-19 | 2008-03-26 | 阿尔卑斯电气株式会社 | Light control circuit |
US7359640B2 (en) | 2003-09-30 | 2008-04-15 | Stmicroelectronics Sa | Optical coupling device and method for bidirectional data communication over a common signal line |
US7362320B2 (en) | 2003-06-05 | 2008-04-22 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Electronic device having a light emitting/detecting display screen |
US20080107029A1 (en) | 2006-11-08 | 2008-05-08 | Honeywell International Inc. | Embedded self-checking asynchronous pipelined enforcement (escape) |
US7372859B2 (en) | 2003-11-19 | 2008-05-13 | Honeywell International Inc. | Self-checking pair on a braided ring network |
US20080120559A1 (en) | 2006-11-17 | 2008-05-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Switchable user interfaces |
WO2008065607A2 (en) | 2006-11-30 | 2008-06-05 | Philips Intellectual Property & Standards Gmbh | Intrinsic flux sensing |
US20080136771A1 (en) | 2006-12-11 | 2008-06-12 | Innocom Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. | Backlight control circuit with primary and secondary switch units |
US20080136770A1 (en) | 2006-12-07 | 2008-06-12 | Microsemi Corp. - Analog Mixed Signal Group Ltd. | Thermal Control for LED Backlight |
US20080136334A1 (en) | 2006-12-12 | 2008-06-12 | Robinson Shane P | System and method for controlling lighting |
US20080150864A1 (en) | 2006-12-21 | 2008-06-26 | Nokia Corporation | Displays with large dynamic range |
US7400310B2 (en) | 2005-11-28 | 2008-07-15 | Draeger Medical Systems, Inc. | Pulse signal drive circuit |
US20080186898A1 (en) | 2005-01-25 | 2008-08-07 | Sipco, Llc | Wireless Network Protocol System And Methods |
US20080222367A1 (en) | 2006-04-05 | 2008-09-11 | Ramon Co | Branching Memory-Bus Module with Multiple Downlink Ports to Standard Fully-Buffered Memory Modules |
US20080235418A1 (en) | 2006-12-20 | 2008-09-25 | Jds Uniphase Corporation | Optical Data Link |
US20080253766A1 (en) | 2007-04-13 | 2008-10-16 | Motorola, Inc. | Synchronization and Processing of Secure Information Via Optically Transmitted Data |
US20080265799A1 (en) | 2007-04-20 | 2008-10-30 | Sibert W Olin | Illumination control network |
WO2008129453A1 (en) | 2007-04-20 | 2008-10-30 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Lighting device with a led used for sensing |
US7445340B2 (en) | 2005-05-19 | 2008-11-04 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Polarized, LED-based illumination source |
US20080297070A1 (en) | 2007-05-30 | 2008-12-04 | Udo Kuenzler | Programmable lighting unit and remote control for a programmable lighting unit |
US20080304833A1 (en) | 2006-02-17 | 2008-12-11 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Illumination Light Wireless Communication System |
JP2008300152A (en) | 2007-05-30 | 2008-12-11 | Nakagawa Kenkyusho:Kk | Light-emitting diode automatic dimming device |
US20080309255A1 (en) | 2007-05-08 | 2008-12-18 | Cree Led Lighting Solutions, Inc | Lighting devices and methods for lighting |
US20080317475A1 (en) | 2007-05-24 | 2008-12-25 | Federal Law Enforcement Development Services, Inc. | Led light interior room and building communication system |
US20090016390A1 (en) | 2007-07-12 | 2009-01-15 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Light source device, image display apparatus, and monitor apparatus |
US20090026978A1 (en) | 2006-02-23 | 2009-01-29 | Tir Technology Lp | System and method for light source identification |
DE102007036978A1 (en) | 2007-08-06 | 2009-02-12 | Tridonicatco Gmbh & Co. Kg | Device and method for controlling the light output |
US20090040154A1 (en) | 2007-08-08 | 2009-02-12 | Scheibe Paul O | Method for computing drive currents for a plurality of leds in a pixel of a signboard to achieve a desired color at a desired luminous intensity |
US20090049295A1 (en) | 2005-10-07 | 2009-02-19 | International Business Machines Corporation | Determining a boot image based on a requesting client address |
US20090051496A1 (en) | 2007-08-22 | 2009-02-26 | Kourosh Pahlavan | Method and Apparatus for Low Power Modulation and Massive Medium Access Control |
US7511695B2 (en) | 2004-07-12 | 2009-03-31 | Sony Corporation | Display unit and backlight unit |
US7525611B2 (en) | 2006-01-24 | 2009-04-28 | Astronautics Corporation Of America | Night vision compatible display backlight |
US20090121238A1 (en) | 2007-11-08 | 2009-05-14 | John Patrick Peck | Double collimator led color mixing system |
CN101458067A (en) | 2008-12-31 | 2009-06-17 | 苏州大学 | Laser flare measuring device and measuring method thereof |
JP2009134877A (en) | 2007-11-28 | 2009-06-18 | Sharp Corp | Lighting apparatus |
US7554514B2 (en) | 2004-04-12 | 2009-06-30 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Electro-optical device and electronic apparatus |
US20090171571A1 (en) | 2007-12-31 | 2009-07-02 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd | Navigation system and method using visible light communication |
US20090196282A1 (en) | 1998-08-19 | 2009-08-06 | Great Links G.B. Limited Liability Company | Methods and apparatus for providing quality-of-service guarantees in computer networks |
US7573210B2 (en) | 2004-10-12 | 2009-08-11 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and system for feedback and control of a luminaire |
US7583901B2 (en) | 2002-10-24 | 2009-09-01 | Nakagawa Laboratories, Inc. | Illuminative light communication device |
US20090245101A1 (en) | 2003-07-01 | 2009-10-01 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for transmitting reverse packet data in mobile communication system |
US7607798B2 (en) | 2006-09-25 | 2009-10-27 | Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | LED lighting unit |
US20090278789A1 (en) | 2008-04-09 | 2009-11-12 | Declercq Bjorn | Scanning backlight color control |
US7619193B2 (en) | 2005-06-03 | 2009-11-17 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | System and method for controlling a LED luminary |
US20090284511A1 (en) | 2005-11-28 | 2009-11-19 | Kyocera Corporation | Image Display Apparatus and Driving Method Thereof |
US20090303972A1 (en) | 2008-06-06 | 2009-12-10 | Silver Spring Networks | Dynamic Scrambling Techniques for Reducing Killer Packets in a Wireless Network |
US20100005533A1 (en) | 2006-08-04 | 2010-01-07 | Yeda Research & Development Co. Ltd. | Method and apparatus for protecting rfid tags from power analysis |
US7649527B2 (en) | 2003-09-08 | 2010-01-19 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Image display system with light pen |
US20100020264A1 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2010-01-28 | Shingo Ohkawa | Light emitting device assembly, surface light source device, liquid crystal display device assembly, and light output member |
US7659672B2 (en) | 2006-09-29 | 2010-02-09 | O2Micro International Ltd. | LED driver |
US20100054748A1 (en) | 2007-03-13 | 2010-03-04 | Yoshiyuki Sato | Receiver and system for visible light communication |
US20100061734A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2010-03-11 | Knapp David J | Optical communication device, method and system |
US7683864B2 (en) | 2006-01-24 | 2010-03-23 | Samsung Electro-Mechanics Co., Ltd. | LED driving apparatus with temperature compensation function |
US7701151B2 (en) | 2007-10-19 | 2010-04-20 | American Sterilizer Company | Lighting control system having temperature compensation and trim circuits |
US20100096447A1 (en) | 2007-03-09 | 2010-04-22 | Sunghoon Kwon | Optical identification tag, reader and system |
US20100134021A1 (en) | 2007-04-02 | 2010-06-03 | John Alfred Ayres | Momentary Night Light Assembly |
US20100134024A1 (en) | 2008-11-30 | 2010-06-03 | Cree, Inc. | Led thermal management system and method |
US7733488B1 (en) | 2007-01-26 | 2010-06-08 | Revolution Optics, Llc | Compact multi-wavelength optical reader and method of acquiring optical data on clustered assay samples using differing-wavelength light sources |
US20100141159A1 (en) | 2008-12-08 | 2010-06-10 | Green Solution Technology Inc. | Led driving circuit and controller with temperature compensation thereof |
US7737936B2 (en) | 2001-11-09 | 2010-06-15 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Liquid crystal display backlight with modulation |
US20100182294A1 (en) | 2007-06-15 | 2010-07-22 | Rakesh Roshan | Solid state illumination system |
US20100188972A1 (en) | 2009-01-27 | 2010-07-29 | Knapp David J | Fault tolerant network utilizing bi-directional point-to-point communications links between nodes |
US20100188443A1 (en) | 2007-01-19 | 2010-07-29 | Pixtronix, Inc | Sensor-based feedback for display apparatus |
US20100194299A1 (en) | 2009-02-05 | 2010-08-05 | Ye Byoung-Dae | Method of driving a light source, light source apparatus for performing the method, and display apparatus having the light source apparatus |
US20100213856A1 (en) | 2009-02-24 | 2010-08-26 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Power supply apparatus, method for driving power supply apparatus, light source apparatus equipped with power supply apparatus, and electronic apparatus |
US7801600B1 (en) | 2005-05-26 | 2010-09-21 | Boston Scientific Neuromodulation Corporation | Controlling charge flow in the electrical stimulation of tissue |
US20100272437A1 (en) | 2005-12-09 | 2010-10-28 | Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute | Tdma passive optical network olt system for broadcast service |
WO2010124315A1 (en) | 2009-04-30 | 2010-11-04 | Tridonic Gmbh & Co Kg | Control method for illumination |
US7828479B1 (en) | 2003-04-08 | 2010-11-09 | National Semiconductor Corporation | Three-terminal dual-diode system for fully differential remote temperature sensors |
US20100301777A1 (en) | 2007-09-07 | 2010-12-02 | Regine Kraemer | Method and Device For Adjusting the Color or Photometric Properties of an Led Illumination Device |
US20100327764A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2010-12-30 | Knapp David J | Intelligent illumination device |
EP2273851A2 (en) | 2009-06-24 | 2011-01-12 | Nxp B.V. | System and method for controlling LED cluster |
US20110031894A1 (en) | 2009-08-04 | 2011-02-10 | Cree Led Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Lighting device having first, second and third groups of solid state light emitters, and lighting arrangement |
US20110044343A1 (en) | 1998-09-02 | 2011-02-24 | Stratumone Communications, Corp. | Method and Apparatus for Transceiving Multiple Services Data Simultaneously Over SONET/SDH |
US20110052214A1 (en) | 2009-09-02 | 2011-03-03 | Shimada Shigehito | Method and apparatus for visible light communication with image processing |
US20110063214A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-03-17 | Knapp David J | Display and optical pointer systems and related methods |
US20110062874A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-03-17 | Knapp David J | LED calibration systems and related methods |
US20110063268A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-03-17 | Knapp David J | Display calibration systems and related methods |
US20110069960A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-03-24 | Knapp David J | Systems and methods for visible light communication |
US20110069094A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-03-24 | Knapp David J | Illumination devices and related systems and methods |
US20110068699A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-03-24 | Knapp David J | Broad spectrum light source calibration systems and related methods |
US20110084701A1 (en) | 2009-09-07 | 2011-04-14 | Nxp B.V. | Testing of leds |
US20110133654A1 (en) | 2008-07-30 | 2011-06-09 | Photonstar Led Limited | Tunable colour led module |
US20110148315A1 (en) | 2008-09-04 | 2011-06-23 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and device for driving a multicolor light source |
US20110150028A1 (en) | 2009-12-18 | 2011-06-23 | Nxp B.V. | Self-calibration circuit and method for junction temperature estimation |
US20110187281A1 (en) | 2010-01-29 | 2011-08-04 | Silitek Electronic (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd. | Method for operating ac light-emitting diode |
US8013538B2 (en) | 2007-01-26 | 2011-09-06 | Integrated Illumination Systems, Inc. | TRI-light |
US8018135B2 (en) | 2007-10-10 | 2011-09-13 | Cree, Inc. | Lighting device and method of making |
US20110241572A1 (en) | 2010-04-02 | 2011-10-06 | Wanfeng Zhang | Led controller with compensation for die-to-die variation and temperature drift |
US20110248640A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-10-13 | Petrus Johannes Maria Welten | Led based lighting application |
US8040299B2 (en) | 2007-03-16 | 2011-10-18 | Thales | Active matrix of an organic light-emitting diode display screen |
US20110253915A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-10-20 | Knapp David J | Led transceiver front end circuitry and related methods |
US8044899B2 (en) | 2007-06-27 | 2011-10-25 | Hong Kong Applied Science and Technology Research Institute Company Limited | Methods and apparatus for backlight calibration |
US8044918B2 (en) | 2006-12-04 | 2011-10-25 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Back light apparatus and control method thereof |
US8057072B2 (en) | 2008-12-12 | 2011-11-15 | Toshiba Lighting & Technology Corporation | Light-emitting module and illumination apparatus |
US20110299854A1 (en) | 2010-06-07 | 2011-12-08 | Greenwave Reality, Inc. | Light Bulb with IR Transmitter |
US8075182B2 (en) | 2007-12-14 | 2011-12-13 | Industrial Technology Research Institute | Apparatus and method for measuring characteristic and chip temperature of LED |
US8076869B2 (en) | 2008-10-17 | 2011-12-13 | Light Prescriptions Innovators, Llc | Quantum dimming via sequential stepped modulation of LED arrays |
US20110309754A1 (en) | 2007-08-07 | 2011-12-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and apparatus for discriminating modulated light in a mixed light system |
US20120001570A1 (en) | 2009-03-20 | 2012-01-05 | Nxp B.V. | Method of controlling an led, and an led controller |
WO2012005771A2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2012-01-12 | Cree, Inc. | Compact optically efficient solid state light source with integrated thermal management |
US20120056545A1 (en) | 2009-05-08 | 2012-03-08 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | circuit for and a method of sensing a property of light |
WO2012042429A2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2012-04-05 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Illumination device and luminaire |
US8159150B2 (en) | 2006-04-21 | 2012-04-17 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and apparatus for light intensity control |
US8174197B2 (en) | 2009-04-09 | 2012-05-08 | Ge Lighting Solutions Llc | Power control circuit and method |
US20120153839A1 (en) | 2010-12-17 | 2012-06-21 | Simplexgrinnell Lp | Automatic color correction for a dome light display device |
CN102573214A (en) | 2010-11-19 | 2012-07-11 | 夏普株式会社 | LED drive circuit and LED illumination apparatus |
US8264171B1 (en) * | 2009-05-22 | 2012-09-11 | Ixys Corporation | In-situ LED junction temperature monitoring using LED as temperature sensor |
US20120229032A1 (en) | 2011-03-08 | 2012-09-13 | Cree, Inc. | Method and apparatus for controlling light output color and/or brightness |
CN102695332A (en) | 2011-01-17 | 2012-09-26 | 辐射研究有限公司 | Hybrid power control system |
US8283876B2 (en) | 2009-09-17 | 2012-10-09 | Dialog Semiconductor Gmbh | Circuit for driving an infrared transmitter LED with temperature compensation |
US8299722B2 (en) * | 2008-12-12 | 2012-10-30 | Cirrus Logic, Inc. | Time division light output sensing and brightness adjustment for different spectra of light emitting diodes |
US20120286694A1 (en) | 2011-05-13 | 2012-11-15 | Nxp B.V. | Method of power and temperature control for high brightness light emitting diodes |
US20120299481A1 (en) | 2011-05-26 | 2012-11-29 | Terralux, Inc. | In-circuit temperature measurement of light-emitting diodes |
US20120306370A1 (en) | 2011-06-03 | 2012-12-06 | Cree, Inc. | Lighting devices with individually compensating multi-color clusters |
US20130009551A1 (en) | 2011-07-08 | 2013-01-10 | Firefly Green Technologies, Inc. | Luminance Control for Illumination Devices |
US20130016978A1 (en) | 2011-07-12 | 2013-01-17 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method of visible light communication using illuminance sensor and mobile communication terminal for the same |
US8362707B2 (en) * | 2008-12-12 | 2013-01-29 | Cirrus Logic, Inc. | Light emitting diode based lighting system with time division ambient light feedback response |
WO2013041109A1 (en) | 2011-09-23 | 2013-03-28 | Martin Professional A/S | Method of controling illumination device based on current-voltage model |
US20130088522A1 (en) | 2011-10-05 | 2013-04-11 | Apple Inc. | White point uniformity techniques for displays |
WO2013142437A1 (en) | 2012-03-18 | 2013-09-26 | Robe Lighting, Inc. | Improved collimation system for an led luminaire |
US20130257314A1 (en) | 2010-09-23 | 2013-10-03 | Diehl Ako Stiftung & Co. Kg | Method of operating an led lighting system |
US8569974B2 (en) | 2010-11-01 | 2013-10-29 | Cree, Inc. | Systems and methods for controlling solid state lighting devices and lighting apparatus incorporating such systems and/or methods |
US20130293147A1 (en) | 2012-05-04 | 2013-11-07 | Jason Rogers | Algorithm for color corrected analog dimming in multi-color led system |
US8595748B1 (en) | 2007-12-21 | 2013-11-26 | Ibiquity Digital Corporation | Systems and methods for transmitting and receiving large objects via digital radio broadcast |
US8624527B1 (en) | 2009-03-27 | 2014-01-07 | Oree, Inc. | Independently controllable illumination device |
US8633655B2 (en) | 2010-09-15 | 2014-01-21 | Azurelighting Technologies, Inc. | LED (Light-Emitting Diode) output power adjusting device and method thereof |
US20140028377A1 (en) | 2012-07-26 | 2014-01-30 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Autonomous thermal controller for power management ic |
US8680787B2 (en) | 2011-03-15 | 2014-03-25 | Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. | Load control device for a light-emitting diode light source |
CN103718005A (en) | 2011-06-27 | 2014-04-09 | 克里公司 | Apparatus and methods for optical control of lighting devices |
US8704666B2 (en) | 2009-09-21 | 2014-04-22 | Covidien Lp | Medical device interface customization systems and methods |
US8721115B2 (en) | 2010-05-28 | 2014-05-13 | Luxingtek, Ltd. | Light reflective structure and light panel |
US8773032B2 (en) | 2011-07-11 | 2014-07-08 | Thin-Lite Corporation | LED light source with multiple independent control inputs and interoperability |
US8791647B2 (en) | 2011-12-28 | 2014-07-29 | Dialog Semiconductor Inc. | Predictive control of power converter for LED driver |
US20140333202A1 (en) | 2011-11-28 | 2014-11-13 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Spot mode operation for a discharge lamp |
US8911160B2 (en) | 2005-09-27 | 2014-12-16 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Light emitting device package and backlight unit using the same |
US20150022110A1 (en) | 2013-07-19 | 2015-01-22 | Institut National D'optique | Controlled operation of a led lighting system at a target output color |
US20150055960A1 (en) | 2013-08-26 | 2015-02-26 | Applied Optoelectronics, Inc. | Heated laser package with increased efficiency for optical transmitter systems |
US20150155459A1 (en) | 2012-06-07 | 2015-06-04 | Shikoku Instrumentation Co., Ltd. | Led illumination module and led illumination apparatus |
US9084310B2 (en) | 2011-06-10 | 2015-07-14 | Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. | Method and apparatus for adjusting an ambient light threshold |
US9155155B1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2015-10-06 | Ketra, Inc. | Overlapping measurement sequences for interference-resistant compensation in light emitting diode devices |
US20150312990A1 (en) | 2014-04-23 | 2015-10-29 | Cree, Inc. | Solid state lighting devices with adjustable color point |
US20150351187A1 (en) | 2014-05-30 | 2015-12-03 | Cree, Inc. | Lighting fixture providing variable cct |
US9210750B2 (en) | 2012-03-27 | 2015-12-08 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | LED lighting system |
US20150377695A1 (en) | 2014-06-25 | 2015-12-31 | Ketra, Inc. | Emitter Module for an LED Illumination Device |
US20150382425A1 (en) | 2014-06-25 | 2015-12-31 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination Device and Method for Calibrating and Controlling an Illumination Device Comprising a Phosphor Converted LED |
US9237620B1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2016-01-12 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and temperature compensation method |
US9247605B1 (en) * | 2013-08-20 | 2016-01-26 | Ketra, Inc. | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices |
US9332598B1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2016-05-03 | Ketra, Inc. | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices having multiple emitter modules |
US9345097B1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2016-05-17 | Ketra, Inc. | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals |
US9360174B2 (en) | 2013-12-05 | 2016-06-07 | Ketra, Inc. | Linear LED illumination device with improved color mixing |
US9392660B2 (en) | 2014-08-28 | 2016-07-12 | Ketra, Inc. | LED illumination device and calibration method for accurately characterizing the emission LEDs and photodetector(s) included within the LED illumination device |
US9392663B2 (en) | 2014-06-25 | 2016-07-12 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and method for controlling an illumination device over changes in drive current and temperature |
US9485813B1 (en) | 2015-01-26 | 2016-11-01 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and method for avoiding an over-power or over-current condition in a power converter |
US9500324B2 (en) | 2014-09-02 | 2016-11-22 | Ketra, Inc. | Color mixing optics for LED lighting |
US9510416B2 (en) | 2014-08-28 | 2016-11-29 | Ketra, Inc. | LED illumination device and method for accurately controlling the intensity and color point of the illumination device over time |
US9538619B2 (en) | 2012-10-26 | 2017-01-03 | Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. | Controllable light source |
US9557214B2 (en) * | 2014-06-25 | 2017-01-31 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and method for calibrating an illumination device over changes in temperature, drive current, and time |
US9578724B1 (en) * | 2013-08-20 | 2017-02-21 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and method for avoiding flicker |
US9651632B1 (en) * | 2013-08-20 | 2017-05-16 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and temperature calibration method |
US9736895B1 (en) | 2013-10-03 | 2017-08-15 | Ketra, Inc. | Color mixing optics for LED illumination device |
US9769899B2 (en) * | 2014-06-25 | 2017-09-19 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and age compensation method |
US9888543B2 (en) | 2014-12-19 | 2018-02-06 | Lutron Electronics Co, Inc. | Multi-channel lighting fixture having multiple light-emitting diode drivers |
US20180084617A1 (en) | 2016-09-20 | 2018-03-22 | Bolb Inc. | Ultraviolet light module having output power control mechanism |
US9954435B2 (en) | 2014-12-19 | 2018-04-24 | Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. | Calibration of a load control device for a light-emitting diode light source |
US20180160491A1 (en) | 2016-12-05 | 2018-06-07 | Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. | Systems and methods for controlling color temperature |
Family Cites Families (11)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8172097B2 (en) | 2005-11-10 | 2012-05-08 | Daktronics, Inc. | LED display module |
US9074751B2 (en) | 2008-06-20 | 2015-07-07 | Seoul Semiconductor Co., Ltd. | Lighting apparatus |
US8287150B2 (en) | 2009-01-30 | 2012-10-16 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Reflector alignment recess |
US8643043B2 (en) | 2009-02-19 | 2014-02-04 | Rohm Co., Ltd. | LED lighting device |
JPWO2011007874A1 (en) | 2009-07-17 | 2012-12-27 | 電気化学工業株式会社 | LED chip assembly, LED package, and manufacturing method of LED package |
KR101114159B1 (en) | 2009-07-23 | 2012-03-09 | 엘지이노텍 주식회사 | Lgiht emitting device |
KR20120135003A (en) | 2010-04-09 | 2012-12-12 | 미쓰비시 가가꾸 가부시키가이샤 | Light control apparatus and led illumination system |
US8657463B2 (en) | 2010-07-01 | 2014-02-25 | Jan Flemming Samuel Lichten | Lighting fixture for a poultry house |
KR101781424B1 (en) | 2010-11-26 | 2017-09-26 | 서울반도체 주식회사 | LED Illumination Equipment |
US9004724B2 (en) | 2011-03-21 | 2015-04-14 | GE Lighting Solutions, LLC | Reflector (optics) used in LED deco lamp |
KR101227525B1 (en) | 2011-08-12 | 2013-01-31 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Lighting apparatus |
-
2018
- 2018-05-17 US US15/982,681 patent/USRE48956E1/en active Active
-
2020
- 2020-11-02 US US17/087,562 patent/USRE49705E1/en active Active
Patent Citations (353)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4029976A (en) | 1976-04-23 | 1977-06-14 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy | Amplifier for fiber optics application |
US4744672A (en) | 1980-03-11 | 1988-05-17 | Semikron Gesellschaft fur Gleichrichterbau und Elektronik mbH | Semiconductor arrangement |
US4402090A (en) | 1980-12-23 | 1983-08-30 | International Business Machines Corp. | Communication system in which data are transferred between terminal stations and satellite stations by infrared signals |
EP0196347A1 (en) | 1985-04-02 | 1986-10-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Infrared communication system |
US4713841A (en) | 1985-06-03 | 1987-12-15 | Itt Electro Optical Products, A Division Of Itt Corporation | Synchronous, asynchronous, data rate transparent fiber optic communications link |
US4809359A (en) | 1986-12-24 | 1989-02-28 | Dockery Devan T | System for extending the effective operational range of an infrared remote control system |
US4745402A (en) | 1987-02-19 | 1988-05-17 | Rca Licensing Corporation | Input device for a display system using phase-encoded signals |
US5299046A (en) | 1989-03-17 | 1994-03-29 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Self-sufficient photon-driven component |
US5181015A (en) | 1989-11-07 | 1993-01-19 | Proxima Corporation | Method and apparatus for calibrating an optical computer input system |
US5018057A (en) | 1990-01-17 | 1991-05-21 | Lamp Technologies, Inc. | Touch initiated light module |
US5103466A (en) | 1990-03-26 | 1992-04-07 | Intel Corporation | CMOS digital clock and data recovery circuit |
US5193201A (en) | 1990-04-23 | 1993-03-09 | Tymes Laroy | System for converting a received modulated light into both power for the system and image data displayed by the system |
EP0456462A2 (en) | 1990-05-09 | 1991-11-13 | Michael William Smith | Electronic display device, display setting apparatus and display system |
US6069929A (en) | 1991-04-26 | 2000-05-30 | Fujitsu Limited | Wireless communication system compulsively turning remote terminals into inactive state |
US5218356A (en) | 1991-05-31 | 1993-06-08 | Guenther Knapp | Wireless indoor data relay system |
US5317441A (en) | 1991-10-21 | 1994-05-31 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | Transceiver for full duplex signalling on a fiber optic cable |
JPH06302384A (en) | 1993-04-15 | 1994-10-28 | Matsushita Electric Works Ltd | Remote control lighting system |
US5657145A (en) | 1993-10-19 | 1997-08-12 | Bsc Developments Ltd. | Modulation and coding for transmission using fluorescent tubes |
EP0677983A2 (en) | 1994-04-13 | 1995-10-18 | General Electric Company | Gas discharge lamp ballast circuit with automatically calibrated light feedback control |
US5619262A (en) | 1994-11-18 | 1997-04-08 | Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. | Solid-state image pickup apparatus including a unit cell array |
JPH08201472A (en) | 1995-01-27 | 1996-08-09 | Stanley Electric Co Ltd | Method for detecting lifetime of led signal lamp |
US5797085A (en) | 1995-04-28 | 1998-08-18 | U.S. Phillips Corporation | Wireless communication system for reliable communication between a group of apparatuses |
US5541759A (en) | 1995-05-09 | 1996-07-30 | Microsym Computers, Inc. | Single fiber transceiver and network |
US20010020123A1 (en) | 1995-06-07 | 2001-09-06 | Mohamed Kheir Diab | Manual and automatic probe calibration |
GB2307577A (en) | 1995-10-31 | 1997-05-28 | Anthony Michael David Marvin | Communication system |
US7006768B1 (en) | 1997-01-02 | 2006-02-28 | Franklin Philip G | Method and apparatus for the zonal transmission of data using building lighting fixtures |
US7352972B2 (en) | 1997-01-02 | 2008-04-01 | Convergence Wireless, Inc. | Method and apparatus for the zonal transmission of data using building lighting fixtures |
US20050169643A1 (en) | 1997-01-02 | 2005-08-04 | Franklin Philip G. | Method and apparatus for the zonal transmission of data using building lighting fixtures |
US6250774B1 (en) | 1997-01-23 | 2001-06-26 | U.S. Philips Corp. | Luminaire |
US6396815B1 (en) | 1997-02-18 | 2002-05-28 | Virata Limited | Proxy-controlled ATM subnetwork |
US5905445A (en) | 1997-05-05 | 1999-05-18 | Delco Electronics Corp. | Keyless entry system with fast program mode |
US6094340A (en) | 1997-05-27 | 2000-07-25 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus of coupling liquid crystal panel for liquid crystal display |
JPH1125822A (en) | 1997-06-30 | 1999-01-29 | Matsushita Electric Works Ltd | Wall switch |
US6094014A (en) | 1997-08-01 | 2000-07-25 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Circuit arrangement, and signaling light provided with the circuit arrangement |
US7161311B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2007-01-09 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Multicolored LED lighting method and apparatus |
US6150774A (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2000-11-21 | Color Kinetics, Incorporated | Multicolored LED lighting method and apparatus |
US6975079B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2005-12-13 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Systems and methods for controlling illumination sources |
US20040052076A1 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2004-03-18 | Mueller George G. | Controlled lighting methods and apparatus |
US6016038A (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2000-01-18 | Color Kinetics, Inc. | Multicolored LED lighting method and apparatus |
US7135824B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2006-11-14 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Systems and methods for controlling illumination sources |
US6806659B1 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2004-10-19 | Color Kinetics, Incorporated | Multicolored LED lighting method and apparatus |
US6965205B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2005-11-15 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Light emitting diode based products |
JP2001514432A (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2001-09-11 | カラー・キネティックス・インコーポレーテッド | Multicolor LED lighting method and apparatus |
US6788011B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2004-09-07 | Color Kinetics, Incorporated | Multicolored LED lighting method and apparatus |
US6067595A (en) | 1997-09-23 | 2000-05-23 | Icore Technologies, Inc. | Method and apparatus for enabling high-performance intelligent I/O subsystems using multi-port memories |
US6084231A (en) | 1997-12-22 | 2000-07-04 | Popat; Pradeep P. | Closed-loop, daylight-sensing, automatic window-covering system insensitive to radiant spectrum produced by gaseous-discharge lamps |
US6108114A (en) | 1998-01-22 | 2000-08-22 | Methode Electronics, Inc. | Optoelectronic transmitter having an improved power control circuit for rapidly enabling a semiconductor laser |
US6359712B1 (en) | 1998-02-23 | 2002-03-19 | Taiyo Yuden Co., Ltd. | Bidirectional optical communication apparatus and optical remote control apparatus |
US6147458A (en) | 1998-07-01 | 2000-11-14 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Circuit arrangement and signalling light provided with the circuit arrangement |
US20090196282A1 (en) | 1998-08-19 | 2009-08-06 | Great Links G.B. Limited Liability Company | Methods and apparatus for providing quality-of-service guarantees in computer networks |
US20110044343A1 (en) | 1998-09-02 | 2011-02-24 | Stratumone Communications, Corp. | Method and Apparatus for Transceiving Multiple Services Data Simultaneously Over SONET/SDH |
US6234645B1 (en) | 1998-09-28 | 2001-05-22 | U.S. Philips Cororation | LED lighting system for producing white light |
US6234648B1 (en) | 1998-09-28 | 2001-05-22 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Lighting system |
US6356774B1 (en) | 1998-09-29 | 2002-03-12 | Mallinckrodt, Inc. | Oximeter sensor with encoded temperature characteristic |
US6495964B1 (en) | 1998-12-18 | 2002-12-17 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LED luminaire with electrically adjusted color balance using photodetector |
WO2000037904A1 (en) | 1998-12-18 | 2000-06-29 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Led luminaire |
US6127783A (en) | 1998-12-18 | 2000-10-03 | Philips Electronics North America Corp. | LED luminaire with electronically adjusted color balance |
CN1291282A (en) | 1998-12-18 | 2001-04-11 | 皇家菲利浦电子有限公司 | Luminous diode lighting device |
US7233831B2 (en) | 1999-07-14 | 2007-06-19 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Systems and methods for controlling programmable lighting systems |
US6344641B1 (en) | 1999-08-11 | 2002-02-05 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | System and method for on-chip calibration of illumination sources for an integrated circuit display |
US6333605B1 (en) | 1999-11-02 | 2001-12-25 | Energy Savings, Inc. | Light modulating electronic ballast |
US7014336B1 (en) | 1999-11-18 | 2006-03-21 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Systems and methods for generating and modulating illumination conditions |
US6513949B1 (en) | 1999-12-02 | 2003-02-04 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LED/phosphor-LED hybrid lighting systems |
US6692136B2 (en) | 1999-12-02 | 2004-02-17 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LED/phosphor-LED hybrid lighting systems |
US20010030668A1 (en) | 2000-01-10 | 2001-10-18 | Gamze Erten | Method and system for interacting with a display |
US6414661B1 (en) | 2000-02-22 | 2002-07-02 | Sarnoff Corporation | Method and apparatus for calibrating display devices and automatically compensating for loss in their efficiency over time |
US6498440B2 (en) | 2000-03-27 | 2002-12-24 | Gentex Corporation | Lamp assembly incorporating optical feedback |
US20020047624A1 (en) | 2000-03-27 | 2002-04-25 | Stam Joseph S. | Lamp assembly incorporating optical feedback |
US20020138850A1 (en) | 2000-03-30 | 2002-09-26 | Coaxmedia, Inc. | Data scrambling system for a shared transmission media |
US6448550B1 (en) | 2000-04-27 | 2002-09-10 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Method and apparatus for measuring spectral content of LED light source and control thereof |
US6831626B2 (en) | 2000-05-25 | 2004-12-14 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Temperature detecting circuit and liquid crystal driving device using same |
US20020014643A1 (en) | 2000-05-30 | 2002-02-07 | Masaru Kubo | Circuit-incorporating photosensitve device |
US6969954B2 (en) | 2000-08-07 | 2005-11-29 | Color Kinetics, Inc. | Automatic configuration systems and methods for lighting and other applications |
US20050030203A1 (en) | 2000-08-29 | 2005-02-10 | Sharp Frank M. | Traffic signal light having ambient light detection |
US6636003B2 (en) | 2000-09-06 | 2003-10-21 | Spectrum Kinetics | Apparatus and method for adjusting the color temperature of white semiconduct or light emitters |
US20020033981A1 (en) | 2000-09-20 | 2002-03-21 | Keller Robert C. | Optical wireless multiport hub |
US20020049933A1 (en) | 2000-10-24 | 2002-04-25 | Takayuki Nyu | Network device and method for detecting a link failure which would cause network to remain in a persistent state |
US6879263B2 (en) | 2000-11-15 | 2005-04-12 | Federal Law Enforcement, Inc. | LED warning light and communication system |
US7046160B2 (en) | 2000-11-15 | 2006-05-16 | Pederson John C | LED warning light and communication system |
US6441558B1 (en) | 2000-12-07 | 2002-08-27 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | White LED luminary light control system |
US20020134908A1 (en) | 2001-01-24 | 2002-09-26 | Applied Optoelectronics, Inc. | Method for determining photodiode performance parameters |
US7330662B2 (en) | 2001-02-01 | 2008-02-12 | International Business Machines Corporation | System and method for remote optical digital networking of computing devices |
US6831569B2 (en) | 2001-03-08 | 2004-12-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and system for assigning and binding a network address of a ballast |
US7038399B2 (en) | 2001-03-13 | 2006-05-02 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for providing power to lighting devices |
US6384545B1 (en) | 2001-03-19 | 2002-05-07 | Ee Theow Lau | Lighting controller |
US20020171608A1 (en) | 2001-05-07 | 2002-11-21 | Izumi Kanai | Image display apparatus for forming an image with a plurality of luminescent points |
CN1396616A (en) | 2001-05-07 | 2003-02-12 | 佳能株式会社 | Image display device for image forming using multiple luminous points |
US6577512B2 (en) | 2001-05-25 | 2003-06-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Power supply for LEDs |
US6741351B2 (en) | 2001-06-07 | 2004-05-25 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LED luminaire with light sensor configurations for optical feedback |
US6617795B2 (en) | 2001-07-26 | 2003-09-09 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Multichip LED package with in-package quantitative and spectral sensing capability and digital signal output |
US7737936B2 (en) | 2001-11-09 | 2010-06-15 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Liquid crystal display backlight with modulation |
US20050077838A1 (en) | 2001-11-26 | 2005-04-14 | Simon Blumel | Circuit for an led array |
US20030103413A1 (en) | 2001-11-30 | 2003-06-05 | Jacobi James J. | Portable universal interface device |
US6853150B2 (en) | 2001-12-28 | 2005-02-08 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light emitting diode driver |
US20030122749A1 (en) | 2001-12-31 | 2003-07-03 | Booth Lawrence A. | Energy sensing light emitting diode display |
JP2005539247A (en) | 2001-12-31 | 2005-12-22 | インテル コーポレイション | Light-emitting diode display that senses energy |
US20030133491A1 (en) | 2002-01-04 | 2003-07-17 | Kelvin Shih | LED junction temperature tester |
US6639574B2 (en) | 2002-01-09 | 2003-10-28 | Landmark Screens Llc | Light-emitting diode display |
US20070279346A1 (en) | 2002-02-20 | 2007-12-06 | Planar Systems, Inc. | Display with embedded image sensor |
EP1482770A1 (en) | 2002-03-01 | 2004-12-01 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Light emitting device and display unit using the light emitting device and reading device |
CN1650673A (en) | 2002-03-01 | 2005-08-03 | 夏普株式会社 | Light emitting device and display unit using the light emitting device and reading device |
WO2003075617A1 (en) | 2002-03-01 | 2003-09-12 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Light emitting device and display unit using the light emitting device and reading device |
US20030179721A1 (en) | 2002-03-21 | 2003-09-25 | Neal Shurmantine | Message control protocol in a communications network having repeaters |
US7072587B2 (en) | 2002-04-03 | 2006-07-04 | Mitsubishi Electric Research Laboratories, Inc. | Communication using bi-directional LEDs |
US6664744B2 (en) | 2002-04-03 | 2003-12-16 | Mitsubishi Electric Research Laboratories, Inc. | Automatic backlight for handheld devices |
US6753661B2 (en) | 2002-06-17 | 2004-06-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LED-based white-light backlighting for electronic displays |
US20040052299A1 (en) | 2002-07-29 | 2004-03-18 | Jay Paul R. | Temperature correction calibration system and method for optical controllers |
US20040101312A1 (en) | 2002-08-29 | 2004-05-27 | Florencio Cabrera | AC power source light modulation network |
US20040044709A1 (en) | 2002-09-03 | 2004-03-04 | Florencio Cabrera | System and method for optical data communication |
US7194209B1 (en) | 2002-09-04 | 2007-03-20 | Xantech Corporation | Interference resistant infrared extension system |
US7583901B2 (en) | 2002-10-24 | 2009-09-01 | Nakagawa Laboratories, Inc. | Illuminative light communication device |
US7262559B2 (en) | 2002-12-19 | 2007-08-28 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LEDS driver |
US20060061288A1 (en) | 2002-12-20 | 2006-03-23 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Sensing light emitted from multiple light sources |
US20040136682A1 (en) | 2002-12-24 | 2004-07-15 | Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha | Electronic device having multiple LEDs |
US20060164291A1 (en) | 2003-03-10 | 2006-07-27 | Staffan Gunnarsson | System for identification using a transponder powered by solar cells |
US7828479B1 (en) | 2003-04-08 | 2010-11-09 | National Semiconductor Corporation | Three-terminal dual-diode system for fully differential remote temperature sensors |
US20040201793A1 (en) | 2003-04-08 | 2004-10-14 | Organic Lighting Technologies Llc | Automatic background color change of a monochrome liquid crystal display |
US7088031B2 (en) | 2003-04-22 | 2006-08-08 | Infinite Power Solutions, Inc. | Method and apparatus for an ambient energy battery or capacitor recharge system |
JP2004325643A (en) | 2003-04-23 | 2004-11-18 | Seiko Epson Corp | Projector and optical apparatus |
US7553033B2 (en) | 2003-04-23 | 2009-06-30 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Projector and optical device |
US20060227085A1 (en) | 2003-04-25 | 2006-10-12 | Boldt Norton K Jr | Led illumination source/display with individual led brightness monitoring capability and calibration method |
US20040220922A1 (en) | 2003-04-30 | 2004-11-04 | Lovison Sean R. | Systems and methods for meeting people via wireless communication among a plurality of wireless devices |
US7362320B2 (en) | 2003-06-05 | 2008-04-22 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Electronic device having a light emitting/detecting display screen |
US20050004727A1 (en) | 2003-06-12 | 2005-01-06 | Donald Remboski | Vehicle network and communication method in a vehicle network |
CN1573881A (en) | 2003-06-20 | 2005-02-02 | 佳能株式会社 | Image display apparatus |
US20040257311A1 (en) | 2003-06-20 | 2004-12-23 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image display apparatus |
US20090245101A1 (en) | 2003-07-01 | 2009-10-01 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for transmitting reverse packet data in mobile communication system |
US7255458B2 (en) | 2003-07-22 | 2007-08-14 | Tir Systems, Ltd. | System and method for the diffusion of illumination produced by discrete light sources |
US7656371B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2010-02-02 | Nichia Corporation | Light emitting apparatus, LED lighting, LED light emitting apparatus, and control method of light emitting apparatus |
CN1830096A (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2006-09-06 | 日亚化学工业株式会社 | Light-emitting apparatus, led illumination, led light-emitting apparatus, and method of controlling light-emitting apparatus |
US20050030267A1 (en) | 2003-08-07 | 2005-02-10 | Gino Tanghe | Method and system for measuring and controlling an OLED display element for improved lifetime and light output |
US20060145887A1 (en) | 2003-08-12 | 2006-07-06 | Overhead Door Corporation | Device including light emitting diode as light sensor and light source |
US20050053378A1 (en) | 2003-09-05 | 2005-03-10 | Speakercraft, Inc. | Interference resistant repeater systems including controller units |
US7649527B2 (en) | 2003-09-08 | 2010-01-19 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Image display system with light pen |
WO2005024898A2 (en) | 2003-09-09 | 2005-03-17 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Integrated lamp with feedback and wireless control |
CN1849707A (en) | 2003-09-09 | 2006-10-18 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Integrated lamp with feedback and wireless control |
US7391406B2 (en) | 2003-09-12 | 2008-06-24 | Rohm Co., Ltd. | Light emission control circuit uniformly and non-uniformly controlling a plurality of light-emitting elements |
CN1596054A (en) | 2003-09-12 | 2005-03-16 | 罗姆股份有限公司 | Light emission control circuit |
US7359640B2 (en) | 2003-09-30 | 2008-04-15 | Stmicroelectronics Sa | Optical coupling device and method for bidirectional data communication over a common signal line |
US7372859B2 (en) | 2003-11-19 | 2008-05-13 | Honeywell International Inc. | Self-checking pair on a braided ring network |
US20050110777A1 (en) | 2003-11-25 | 2005-05-26 | Geaghan Bernard O. | Light-emitting stylus and user input device using same |
US7119500B2 (en) | 2003-12-05 | 2006-10-10 | Dialight Corporation | Dynamic color mixing LED device |
US20050207157A1 (en) | 2003-12-18 | 2005-09-22 | Olympus Corporation | Illumination apparatus and display apparatus using the illumination apparatus |
US7294816B2 (en) | 2003-12-19 | 2007-11-13 | Avago Technologies Ecbu Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | LED illumination system having an intensity monitoring system |
US20070254694A1 (en) | 2004-02-02 | 2007-11-01 | Nakagawa Laboratories, Inc. | Camera-Equipped Cellular Terminal for Visible Light Communication |
US20050200292A1 (en) | 2004-02-24 | 2005-09-15 | Naugler W. E.Jr. | Emissive display device having sensing for luminance stabilization and user light or touch screen input |
US7166966B2 (en) | 2004-02-24 | 2007-01-23 | Nuelight Corporation | Penlight and touch screen data input system and method for flat panel displays |
US7256554B2 (en) | 2004-03-15 | 2007-08-14 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | LED power control methods and apparatus |
US7358706B2 (en) | 2004-03-15 | 2008-04-15 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Power factor correction control methods and apparatus |
US7233115B2 (en) | 2004-03-15 | 2007-06-19 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | LED-based lighting network power control methods and apparatus |
US7554514B2 (en) | 2004-04-12 | 2009-06-30 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Electro-optical device and electronic apparatus |
US20050242742A1 (en) | 2004-04-30 | 2005-11-03 | Cheang Tak M | Light emitting diode based light system with a redundant light source |
US20050265731A1 (en) | 2004-05-28 | 2005-12-01 | Samsung Electronics Co.; Ltd | Wireless terminal for carrying out visible light short-range communication using camera device |
US7511695B2 (en) | 2004-07-12 | 2009-03-31 | Sony Corporation | Display unit and backlight unit |
JP2008507150A (en) | 2004-07-19 | 2008-03-06 | ラミナ ライティング インコーポレーテッド | LED array package with internal feedback and control |
US7252408B2 (en) | 2004-07-19 | 2007-08-07 | Lamina Ceramics, Inc. | LED array package with internal feedback and control |
US7329998B2 (en) | 2004-08-06 | 2008-02-12 | Tir Systems Ltd. | Lighting system including photonic emission and detection using light-emitting elements |
US20080061717A1 (en) | 2004-09-30 | 2008-03-13 | Osram Opto Semiconductors Gmbh | Led Array |
US7573210B2 (en) | 2004-10-12 | 2009-08-11 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and system for feedback and control of a luminaire |
US20060198463A1 (en) | 2004-12-30 | 2006-09-07 | Alcatel | Device for converting a transmitted signal into a digital signal |
US20080186898A1 (en) | 2005-01-25 | 2008-08-07 | Sipco, Llc | Wireless Network Protocol System And Methods |
JP2006260927A (en) | 2005-03-17 | 2006-09-28 | Sony Corp | Illumination device, manufacturing method of the same, and display device |
US20060220990A1 (en) | 2005-04-05 | 2006-10-05 | Osram Sylvania Inc. | Three color LED bulb |
US7445340B2 (en) | 2005-05-19 | 2008-11-04 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Polarized, LED-based illumination source |
US7801600B1 (en) | 2005-05-26 | 2010-09-21 | Boston Scientific Neuromodulation Corporation | Controlling charge flow in the electrical stimulation of tissue |
US7619193B2 (en) | 2005-06-03 | 2009-11-17 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | System and method for controlling a LED luminary |
WO2007004108A1 (en) | 2005-06-30 | 2007-01-11 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and system for controlling the output of a luminaire |
US7319298B2 (en) | 2005-08-17 | 2008-01-15 | Tir Systems, Ltd. | Digitally controlled luminaire system |
US20070040512A1 (en) | 2005-08-17 | 2007-02-22 | Tir Systems Ltd. | Digitally controlled luminaire system |
US7330002B2 (en) | 2005-09-09 | 2008-02-12 | Samsung Electro-Mechanics Co., Ltd. | Circuit for controlling LED with temperature compensation |
US8911160B2 (en) | 2005-09-27 | 2014-12-16 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Light emitting device package and backlight unit using the same |
US20090049295A1 (en) | 2005-10-07 | 2009-02-19 | International Business Machines Corporation | Determining a boot image based on a requesting client address |
US20070109239A1 (en) | 2005-11-14 | 2007-05-17 | Den Boer Willem | Integrated light sensitive liquid crystal display |
US20090284511A1 (en) | 2005-11-28 | 2009-11-19 | Kyocera Corporation | Image Display Apparatus and Driving Method Thereof |
US7400310B2 (en) | 2005-11-28 | 2008-07-15 | Draeger Medical Systems, Inc. | Pulse signal drive circuit |
US20070132592A1 (en) | 2005-12-08 | 2007-06-14 | Palo Alto Research Center Incorporated | Electromagnetic tags |
US20100272437A1 (en) | 2005-12-09 | 2010-10-28 | Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute | Tdma passive optical network olt system for broadcast service |
CN101331798A (en) | 2005-12-16 | 2008-12-24 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Illumination device and method for controlling an illumination device |
WO2007069149A1 (en) | 2005-12-16 | 2007-06-21 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Illumination device and method for controlling an illumination device |
US20070139957A1 (en) | 2005-12-21 | 2007-06-21 | Honeywell International, Inc. | LED backlight system for LCD displays |
US7683864B2 (en) | 2006-01-24 | 2010-03-23 | Samsung Electro-Mechanics Co., Ltd. | LED driving apparatus with temperature compensation function |
US7525611B2 (en) | 2006-01-24 | 2009-04-28 | Astronautics Corporation Of America | Night vision compatible display backlight |
US20080304833A1 (en) | 2006-02-17 | 2008-12-11 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Illumination Light Wireless Communication System |
US20090026978A1 (en) | 2006-02-23 | 2009-01-29 | Tir Technology Lp | System and method for light source identification |
US7606451B2 (en) | 2006-03-28 | 2009-10-20 | Sony Corporation | Optical communication system, optical reader, and method of reading information |
JP2007266974A (en) | 2006-03-28 | 2007-10-11 | Sony Corp | Optical communication system, optical id reader, and information reading method |
JP2007267037A (en) | 2006-03-28 | 2007-10-11 | Matsushita Electric Works Ltd | Illumination light transmission system |
US20080222367A1 (en) | 2006-04-05 | 2008-09-11 | Ramon Co | Branching Memory-Bus Module with Multiple Downlink Ports to Standard Fully-Buffered Memory Modules |
US20070248180A1 (en) | 2006-04-19 | 2007-10-25 | Wherenet Corp., Corporation Of The State Of California | Receiver for object locating and tracking systems and related methods |
US8159150B2 (en) | 2006-04-21 | 2012-04-17 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and apparatus for light intensity control |
US20070284994A1 (en) | 2006-05-29 | 2007-12-13 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Light emitting apparatus, display apparatus and method for controlling light emitting apparatus |
US8035603B2 (en) | 2006-05-30 | 2011-10-11 | Sony Corporation | Illumination system and liquid crystal display |
CN101083866A (en) | 2006-05-30 | 2007-12-05 | 索尼株式会社 | Illumination system and liquid crystal display |
US20100005533A1 (en) | 2006-08-04 | 2010-01-07 | Yeda Research & Development Co. Ltd. | Method and apparatus for protecting rfid tags from power analysis |
CN101150904A (en) | 2006-09-19 | 2008-03-26 | 阿尔卑斯电气株式会社 | Light control circuit |
US7705541B2 (en) | 2006-09-19 | 2010-04-27 | Alps Electric Co., Ltd. | Light control circuit |
US7607798B2 (en) | 2006-09-25 | 2009-10-27 | Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | LED lighting unit |
US7659672B2 (en) | 2006-09-29 | 2010-02-09 | O2Micro International Ltd. | LED driver |
US20080107029A1 (en) | 2006-11-08 | 2008-05-08 | Honeywell International Inc. | Embedded self-checking asynchronous pipelined enforcement (escape) |
US20080120559A1 (en) | 2006-11-17 | 2008-05-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Switchable user interfaces |
US7315139B1 (en) | 2006-11-30 | 2008-01-01 | Avago Technologis Ecbu Ip (Singapore) Pte Ltd | Light source having more than three LEDs in which the color points are maintained using a three channel color sensor |
WO2008065607A2 (en) | 2006-11-30 | 2008-06-05 | Philips Intellectual Property & Standards Gmbh | Intrinsic flux sensing |
US8044918B2 (en) | 2006-12-04 | 2011-10-25 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Back light apparatus and control method thereof |
US20080136770A1 (en) | 2006-12-07 | 2008-06-12 | Microsemi Corp. - Analog Mixed Signal Group Ltd. | Thermal Control for LED Backlight |
US20080136771A1 (en) | 2006-12-11 | 2008-06-12 | Innocom Technology (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. | Backlight control circuit with primary and secondary switch units |
US20080136334A1 (en) | 2006-12-12 | 2008-06-12 | Robinson Shane P | System and method for controlling lighting |
US20080235418A1 (en) | 2006-12-20 | 2008-09-25 | Jds Uniphase Corporation | Optical Data Link |
US20080150864A1 (en) | 2006-12-21 | 2008-06-26 | Nokia Corporation | Displays with large dynamic range |
US20100188443A1 (en) | 2007-01-19 | 2010-07-29 | Pixtronix, Inc | Sensor-based feedback for display apparatus |
US8013538B2 (en) | 2007-01-26 | 2011-09-06 | Integrated Illumination Systems, Inc. | TRI-light |
US7733488B1 (en) | 2007-01-26 | 2010-06-08 | Revolution Optics, Llc | Compact multi-wavelength optical reader and method of acquiring optical data on clustered assay samples using differing-wavelength light sources |
US20100096447A1 (en) | 2007-03-09 | 2010-04-22 | Sunghoon Kwon | Optical identification tag, reader and system |
US20100054748A1 (en) | 2007-03-13 | 2010-03-04 | Yoshiyuki Sato | Receiver and system for visible light communication |
US8040299B2 (en) | 2007-03-16 | 2011-10-18 | Thales | Active matrix of an organic light-emitting diode display screen |
US20100134021A1 (en) | 2007-04-02 | 2010-06-03 | John Alfred Ayres | Momentary Night Light Assembly |
US20080253766A1 (en) | 2007-04-13 | 2008-10-16 | Motorola, Inc. | Synchronization and Processing of Secure Information Via Optically Transmitted Data |
WO2008129453A1 (en) | 2007-04-20 | 2008-10-30 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Lighting device with a led used for sensing |
US20080265799A1 (en) | 2007-04-20 | 2008-10-30 | Sibert W Olin | Illumination control network |
US8174205B2 (en) | 2007-05-08 | 2012-05-08 | Cree, Inc. | Lighting devices and methods for lighting |
US20080309255A1 (en) | 2007-05-08 | 2008-12-18 | Cree Led Lighting Solutions, Inc | Lighting devices and methods for lighting |
US20080317475A1 (en) | 2007-05-24 | 2008-12-25 | Federal Law Enforcement Development Services, Inc. | Led light interior room and building communication system |
JP2008300152A (en) | 2007-05-30 | 2008-12-11 | Nakagawa Kenkyusho:Kk | Light-emitting diode automatic dimming device |
US20080297070A1 (en) | 2007-05-30 | 2008-12-04 | Udo Kuenzler | Programmable lighting unit and remote control for a programmable lighting unit |
US20100182294A1 (en) | 2007-06-15 | 2010-07-22 | Rakesh Roshan | Solid state illumination system |
US8044899B2 (en) | 2007-06-27 | 2011-10-25 | Hong Kong Applied Science and Technology Research Institute Company Limited | Methods and apparatus for backlight calibration |
US20090016390A1 (en) | 2007-07-12 | 2009-01-15 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Light source device, image display apparatus, and monitor apparatus |
CN101772988A (en) | 2007-08-06 | 2010-07-07 | 赤多尼科阿特可两合股份有限公司 | Emission control device and method |
US8358075B2 (en) * | 2007-08-06 | 2013-01-22 | Ledon Lighting Jennersdorf Gmbh | Device and a method for controlling light emission |
DE102007036978A1 (en) | 2007-08-06 | 2009-02-12 | Tridonicatco Gmbh & Co. Kg | Device and method for controlling the light output |
US20110309754A1 (en) | 2007-08-07 | 2011-12-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and apparatus for discriminating modulated light in a mixed light system |
US20090040154A1 (en) | 2007-08-08 | 2009-02-12 | Scheibe Paul O | Method for computing drive currents for a plurality of leds in a pixel of a signboard to achieve a desired color at a desired luminous intensity |
US20090051496A1 (en) | 2007-08-22 | 2009-02-26 | Kourosh Pahlavan | Method and Apparatus for Low Power Modulation and Massive Medium Access Control |
US20100301777A1 (en) | 2007-09-07 | 2010-12-02 | Regine Kraemer | Method and Device For Adjusting the Color or Photometric Properties of an Led Illumination Device |
US8018135B2 (en) | 2007-10-10 | 2011-09-13 | Cree, Inc. | Lighting device and method of making |
US7701151B2 (en) | 2007-10-19 | 2010-04-20 | American Sterilizer Company | Lighting control system having temperature compensation and trim circuits |
US20090121238A1 (en) | 2007-11-08 | 2009-05-14 | John Patrick Peck | Double collimator led color mixing system |
JP2009134877A (en) | 2007-11-28 | 2009-06-18 | Sharp Corp | Lighting apparatus |
US8075182B2 (en) | 2007-12-14 | 2011-12-13 | Industrial Technology Research Institute | Apparatus and method for measuring characteristic and chip temperature of LED |
US8595748B1 (en) | 2007-12-21 | 2013-11-26 | Ibiquity Digital Corporation | Systems and methods for transmitting and receiving large objects via digital radio broadcast |
US20090171571A1 (en) | 2007-12-31 | 2009-07-02 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd | Navigation system and method using visible light communication |
US20090278789A1 (en) | 2008-04-09 | 2009-11-12 | Declercq Bjorn | Scanning backlight color control |
US20090303972A1 (en) | 2008-06-06 | 2009-12-10 | Silver Spring Networks | Dynamic Scrambling Techniques for Reducing Killer Packets in a Wireless Network |
US20100020264A1 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2010-01-28 | Shingo Ohkawa | Light emitting device assembly, surface light source device, liquid crystal display device assembly, and light output member |
US8556438B2 (en) | 2008-07-30 | 2013-10-15 | Synoptics Limited | Tunable colour LED module |
US20110133654A1 (en) | 2008-07-30 | 2011-06-09 | Photonstar Led Limited | Tunable colour led module |
US20110148315A1 (en) | 2008-09-04 | 2011-06-23 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and device for driving a multicolor light source |
US20100327764A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2010-12-30 | Knapp David J | Intelligent illumination device |
US20100061734A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2010-03-11 | Knapp David J | Optical communication device, method and system |
US20110068699A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-03-24 | Knapp David J | Broad spectrum light source calibration systems and related methods |
US20110253915A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-10-20 | Knapp David J | Led transceiver front end circuitry and related methods |
US20110069960A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-03-24 | Knapp David J | Systems and methods for visible light communication |
US20110063268A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-03-17 | Knapp David J | Display calibration systems and related methods |
US20110069094A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-03-24 | Knapp David J | Illumination devices and related systems and methods |
US20110248640A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-10-13 | Petrus Johannes Maria Welten | Led based lighting application |
US20110062874A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-03-17 | Knapp David J | LED calibration systems and related methods |
US20110063214A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-03-17 | Knapp David J | Display and optical pointer systems and related methods |
US8521035B2 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2013-08-27 | Ketra, Inc. | Systems and methods for visible light communication |
US8471496B2 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2013-06-25 | Ketra, Inc. | LED calibration systems and related methods |
US8076869B2 (en) | 2008-10-17 | 2011-12-13 | Light Prescriptions Innovators, Llc | Quantum dimming via sequential stepped modulation of LED arrays |
US20100134024A1 (en) | 2008-11-30 | 2010-06-03 | Cree, Inc. | Led thermal management system and method |
US20100141159A1 (en) | 2008-12-08 | 2010-06-10 | Green Solution Technology Inc. | Led driving circuit and controller with temperature compensation thereof |
US8362707B2 (en) * | 2008-12-12 | 2013-01-29 | Cirrus Logic, Inc. | Light emitting diode based lighting system with time division ambient light feedback response |
US8057072B2 (en) | 2008-12-12 | 2011-11-15 | Toshiba Lighting & Technology Corporation | Light-emitting module and illumination apparatus |
US8299722B2 (en) * | 2008-12-12 | 2012-10-30 | Cirrus Logic, Inc. | Time division light output sensing and brightness adjustment for different spectra of light emitting diodes |
CN101458067A (en) | 2008-12-31 | 2009-06-17 | 苏州大学 | Laser flare measuring device and measuring method thereof |
US20100188972A1 (en) | 2009-01-27 | 2010-07-29 | Knapp David J | Fault tolerant network utilizing bi-directional point-to-point communications links between nodes |
US20100194299A1 (en) | 2009-02-05 | 2010-08-05 | Ye Byoung-Dae | Method of driving a light source, light source apparatus for performing the method, and display apparatus having the light source apparatus |
US20100213856A1 (en) | 2009-02-24 | 2010-08-26 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Power supply apparatus, method for driving power supply apparatus, light source apparatus equipped with power supply apparatus, and electronic apparatus |
US20120001570A1 (en) | 2009-03-20 | 2012-01-05 | Nxp B.V. | Method of controlling an led, and an led controller |
US8624527B1 (en) | 2009-03-27 | 2014-01-07 | Oree, Inc. | Independently controllable illumination device |
US8174197B2 (en) | 2009-04-09 | 2012-05-08 | Ge Lighting Solutions Llc | Power control circuit and method |
WO2010124315A1 (en) | 2009-04-30 | 2010-11-04 | Tridonic Gmbh & Co Kg | Control method for illumination |
US20120056545A1 (en) | 2009-05-08 | 2012-03-08 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | circuit for and a method of sensing a property of light |
US8653758B2 (en) * | 2009-05-08 | 2014-02-18 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Circuit for and a method of sensing a property of light |
CN102422711A (en) | 2009-05-08 | 2012-04-18 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Circuit for and method of sensing property of light |
US8264171B1 (en) * | 2009-05-22 | 2012-09-11 | Ixys Corporation | In-situ LED junction temperature monitoring using LED as temperature sensor |
EP2273851A2 (en) | 2009-06-24 | 2011-01-12 | Nxp B.V. | System and method for controlling LED cluster |
US20110031894A1 (en) | 2009-08-04 | 2011-02-10 | Cree Led Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Lighting device having first, second and third groups of solid state light emitters, and lighting arrangement |
CN102625944A (en) | 2009-08-05 | 2012-08-01 | 萤火虫绿色科技股份有限公司 | Display systems, illumination devices, light communication systems and related methods |
WO2011016860A1 (en) | 2009-08-05 | 2011-02-10 | Firefly Green Technologies Inc. | Display systems, illumination devices, light communication systems and related methods |
US20110052214A1 (en) | 2009-09-02 | 2011-03-03 | Shimada Shigehito | Method and apparatus for visible light communication with image processing |
US20110084701A1 (en) | 2009-09-07 | 2011-04-14 | Nxp B.V. | Testing of leds |
US8283876B2 (en) | 2009-09-17 | 2012-10-09 | Dialog Semiconductor Gmbh | Circuit for driving an infrared transmitter LED with temperature compensation |
US8704666B2 (en) | 2009-09-21 | 2014-04-22 | Covidien Lp | Medical device interface customization systems and methods |
US20110150028A1 (en) | 2009-12-18 | 2011-06-23 | Nxp B.V. | Self-calibration circuit and method for junction temperature estimation |
US20110187281A1 (en) | 2010-01-29 | 2011-08-04 | Silitek Electronic (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd. | Method for operating ac light-emitting diode |
US20110241572A1 (en) | 2010-04-02 | 2011-10-06 | Wanfeng Zhang | Led controller with compensation for die-to-die variation and temperature drift |
US8721115B2 (en) | 2010-05-28 | 2014-05-13 | Luxingtek, Ltd. | Light reflective structure and light panel |
US20110299854A1 (en) | 2010-06-07 | 2011-12-08 | Greenwave Reality, Inc. | Light Bulb with IR Transmitter |
WO2012005771A2 (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2012-01-12 | Cree, Inc. | Compact optically efficient solid state light source with integrated thermal management |
US8633655B2 (en) | 2010-09-15 | 2014-01-21 | Azurelighting Technologies, Inc. | LED (Light-Emitting Diode) output power adjusting device and method thereof |
US20130257314A1 (en) | 2010-09-23 | 2013-10-03 | Diehl Ako Stiftung & Co. Kg | Method of operating an led lighting system |
US20130201690A1 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2013-08-08 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Illumination device and luminaire |
WO2012042429A2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2012-04-05 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Illumination device and luminaire |
US8569974B2 (en) | 2010-11-01 | 2013-10-29 | Cree, Inc. | Systems and methods for controlling solid state lighting devices and lighting apparatus incorporating such systems and/or methods |
US9497808B2 (en) | 2010-11-19 | 2016-11-15 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | LED drive circuit and LED illumination apparatus |
CN102573214A (en) | 2010-11-19 | 2012-07-11 | 夏普株式会社 | LED drive circuit and LED illumination apparatus |
US20120153839A1 (en) | 2010-12-17 | 2012-06-21 | Simplexgrinnell Lp | Automatic color correction for a dome light display device |
US8659237B2 (en) | 2011-01-17 | 2014-02-25 | Radiant Research Limited | Hybrid power control system |
CN102695332A (en) | 2011-01-17 | 2012-09-26 | 辐射研究有限公司 | Hybrid power control system |
US20120229032A1 (en) | 2011-03-08 | 2012-09-13 | Cree, Inc. | Method and apparatus for controlling light output color and/or brightness |
US8680787B2 (en) | 2011-03-15 | 2014-03-25 | Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. | Load control device for a light-emitting diode light source |
US20120286694A1 (en) | 2011-05-13 | 2012-11-15 | Nxp B.V. | Method of power and temperature control for high brightness light emitting diodes |
US8816600B2 (en) | 2011-05-13 | 2014-08-26 | Nxp B.V. | Method of power and temperature control for high brightness light emitting diodes |
US20120299481A1 (en) | 2011-05-26 | 2012-11-29 | Terralux, Inc. | In-circuit temperature measurement of light-emitting diodes |
US20120306370A1 (en) | 2011-06-03 | 2012-12-06 | Cree, Inc. | Lighting devices with individually compensating multi-color clusters |
US9084310B2 (en) | 2011-06-10 | 2015-07-14 | Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. | Method and apparatus for adjusting an ambient light threshold |
US9337925B2 (en) | 2011-06-27 | 2016-05-10 | Cree, Inc. | Apparatus and methods for optical control of lighting devices |
CN103718005A (en) | 2011-06-27 | 2014-04-09 | 克里公司 | Apparatus and methods for optical control of lighting devices |
US20130009551A1 (en) | 2011-07-08 | 2013-01-10 | Firefly Green Technologies, Inc. | Luminance Control for Illumination Devices |
US8749172B2 (en) * | 2011-07-08 | 2014-06-10 | Ketra, Inc. | Luminance control for illumination devices |
US8773032B2 (en) | 2011-07-11 | 2014-07-08 | Thin-Lite Corporation | LED light source with multiple independent control inputs and interoperability |
US20130016978A1 (en) | 2011-07-12 | 2013-01-17 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method of visible light communication using illuminance sensor and mobile communication terminal for the same |
US20140225529A1 (en) | 2011-09-23 | 2014-08-14 | Martin Professional A/S | Method of controling illumination device based on current-voltage model |
WO2013041109A1 (en) | 2011-09-23 | 2013-03-28 | Martin Professional A/S | Method of controling illumination device based on current-voltage model |
US20130088522A1 (en) | 2011-10-05 | 2013-04-11 | Apple Inc. | White point uniformity techniques for displays |
US20140333202A1 (en) | 2011-11-28 | 2014-11-13 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Spot mode operation for a discharge lamp |
US8791647B2 (en) | 2011-12-28 | 2014-07-29 | Dialog Semiconductor Inc. | Predictive control of power converter for LED driver |
WO2013142437A1 (en) | 2012-03-18 | 2013-09-26 | Robe Lighting, Inc. | Improved collimation system for an led luminaire |
US9210750B2 (en) | 2012-03-27 | 2015-12-08 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | LED lighting system |
US20130293147A1 (en) | 2012-05-04 | 2013-11-07 | Jason Rogers | Algorithm for color corrected analog dimming in multi-color led system |
US20150155459A1 (en) | 2012-06-07 | 2015-06-04 | Shikoku Instrumentation Co., Ltd. | Led illumination module and led illumination apparatus |
US20140028377A1 (en) | 2012-07-26 | 2014-01-30 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Autonomous thermal controller for power management ic |
US9538619B2 (en) | 2012-10-26 | 2017-01-03 | Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. | Controllable light source |
US20150022110A1 (en) | 2013-07-19 | 2015-01-22 | Institut National D'optique | Controlled operation of a led lighting system at a target output color |
US9155155B1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2015-10-06 | Ketra, Inc. | Overlapping measurement sequences for interference-resistant compensation in light emitting diode devices |
US9578724B1 (en) * | 2013-08-20 | 2017-02-21 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and method for avoiding flicker |
US9345097B1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2016-05-17 | Ketra, Inc. | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals |
US9651632B1 (en) * | 2013-08-20 | 2017-05-16 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and temperature calibration method |
US9237620B1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2016-01-12 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and temperature compensation method |
US9247605B1 (en) * | 2013-08-20 | 2016-01-26 | Ketra, Inc. | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices |
US9332598B1 (en) | 2013-08-20 | 2016-05-03 | Ketra, Inc. | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices having multiple emitter modules |
US20150055960A1 (en) | 2013-08-26 | 2015-02-26 | Applied Optoelectronics, Inc. | Heated laser package with increased efficiency for optical transmitter systems |
US9736895B1 (en) | 2013-10-03 | 2017-08-15 | Ketra, Inc. | Color mixing optics for LED illumination device |
US9360174B2 (en) | 2013-12-05 | 2016-06-07 | Ketra, Inc. | Linear LED illumination device with improved color mixing |
US20150312990A1 (en) | 2014-04-23 | 2015-10-29 | Cree, Inc. | Solid state lighting devices with adjustable color point |
US20150351187A1 (en) | 2014-05-30 | 2015-12-03 | Cree, Inc. | Lighting fixture providing variable cct |
US20150377695A1 (en) | 2014-06-25 | 2015-12-31 | Ketra, Inc. | Emitter Module for an LED Illumination Device |
US9769899B2 (en) * | 2014-06-25 | 2017-09-19 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and age compensation method |
US10595372B2 (en) | 2014-06-25 | 2020-03-17 | Lutron Ketra, Llc | Illumination device and method for calibrating an illumination device over changes in temperature, drive current, and time |
US9736903B2 (en) * | 2014-06-25 | 2017-08-15 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and method for calibrating and controlling an illumination device comprising a phosphor converted LED |
US9557214B2 (en) * | 2014-06-25 | 2017-01-31 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and method for calibrating an illumination device over changes in temperature, drive current, and time |
US9392663B2 (en) | 2014-06-25 | 2016-07-12 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and method for controlling an illumination device over changes in drive current and temperature |
US20170105260A1 (en) | 2014-06-25 | 2017-04-13 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination Device and Method for Calibrating an Illumination Device over Changes in Temperature, Drive Current, and Time |
US20150382425A1 (en) | 2014-06-25 | 2015-12-31 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination Device and Method for Calibrating and Controlling an Illumination Device Comprising a Phosphor Converted LED |
US9392660B2 (en) | 2014-08-28 | 2016-07-12 | Ketra, Inc. | LED illumination device and calibration method for accurately characterizing the emission LEDs and photodetector(s) included within the LED illumination device |
US9510416B2 (en) | 2014-08-28 | 2016-11-29 | Ketra, Inc. | LED illumination device and method for accurately controlling the intensity and color point of the illumination device over time |
US9500324B2 (en) | 2014-09-02 | 2016-11-22 | Ketra, Inc. | Color mixing optics for LED lighting |
US9888543B2 (en) | 2014-12-19 | 2018-02-06 | Lutron Electronics Co, Inc. | Multi-channel lighting fixture having multiple light-emitting diode drivers |
US9954435B2 (en) | 2014-12-19 | 2018-04-24 | Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. | Calibration of a load control device for a light-emitting diode light source |
US9485813B1 (en) | 2015-01-26 | 2016-11-01 | Ketra, Inc. | Illumination device and method for avoiding an over-power or over-current condition in a power converter |
US20180084617A1 (en) | 2016-09-20 | 2018-03-22 | Bolb Inc. | Ultraviolet light module having output power control mechanism |
US20180160491A1 (en) | 2016-12-05 | 2018-06-07 | Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. | Systems and methods for controlling color temperature |
Non-Patent Citations (93)
Title |
---|
"Color Management of a Red, Green, and Blue LED Combinational Light Source," Avago Technologies, Mar. 2010, pp. 1-8. |
"LED Fundamentals, How to Read a Datasheet (Part 2 of 2) Characteristic Curves, Dimensions and Packaging," Aug. 19, 2011, OSRAM Opto Semiconductors, 17 pages. |
"Office Action for U.S. Appl. No. 14/510,266 dated Jul. 31, 2015",10 pages. |
"Search Report, Chinese Patent Application CN 2018112133483 A, dated Mar. 24, 2021". |
"Visible Light Communication: Tutorial," Project IEEE P802.15 Working Group for Wireless Personal Area Networks (WPANs), Mar. 2008. |
Bouchet et al., "Visible-light communication system enabling 73 Mb/s data streaming," IEEE Globecom Workshop on Optical Wireless Communications, 2010, pp. 1042-1046. |
Chonko, "Use Forward Voltage Drop to Measure Junction Temperature," © 2013 Penton Media, Inc., 5 pages. |
Final Office Action dated Jul. 9, 2013 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,118. |
Final Office Action dated Jun. 14, 2013 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,117. |
Final Office Action dated Jun. 18, 2014 for US Appl. No. 13/231,077. |
Final Office Action dated Nov. 28, 2011 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/360,467. |
Final Office Action dated Oct. 11, 2012 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,121. |
Final Office Action dated Sep. 12, 2012 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/584,143. |
Final Office Action for U.S. Appl. No. 12/803,805 dated Jun. 23, 2015. |
Final Office Action for U.S. Appl. No. 13/773,322 dated Sep. 2, 2015. |
Final Office Action mailed Jan. 28, 2015 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,117. |
Hall et al., "Jet Engine Control Using Ethernet with a BRAIN (Postprint)," AIAA/ASME/SAE/ASEE Joint Propulsion Conference and Exhibition, Jul. 2008, pp. 1-18. |
International Search Report & Written Opinion dated Sep. 19, 2012 for PCT/US2012/045392. |
International Search Report & Written Opinion for PCT/US2012/052774 dated Feb. 4, 2013. |
International Search Report & Written Opinion for PCT/US2014/068556 dated Jun. 22, 2015. |
International Search Report & Written Opinion for PCT/US2015/037660 dated Oct. 28, 2015. |
International Search Report & Written Opinion, PCT/US2010/000219, dated Oct. 12, 2010. |
International Search Report & Written Opinion, PCT/US2010/001919, dated Feb. 24, 2011. |
International Search Report & Written Opinion, PCT/US2010/002171, dated Nov. 24, 2010. |
International Search Report & Written Opinion, PCT/US2010/004953, dated Mar. 22, 2010. |
International Search Report & Written Opinion, PCT/US2013/027157, dated May 16, 2013. |
International Search Report and the Written Opinion for PCT/US2015/035081 dated Jan. 26, 2016. |
International Search Report and the Written Opinion for PCT/US2015/045252 dated Jan. 26, 2016. |
Johnson, "Visibile Light Communications," CTC Tech Brief, Nov. 2009, 2 pages. |
Johnson, "Visible Light Communications," CTC Tech Brief, Nov. 2009, 2 pages. |
Kebemou, "A Partitioning-Centric Approach for the Modeling and the Methodical Design of Automotive Embedded System Architectures," Dissertation of Technical University of Berlin, 2008, 176 pages. |
Notice of Allowance dated Aug. 21, 2014 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/584,143. |
Notice of Allowance dated Feb. 21, 2014 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,118. |
Notice of Allowance dated Feb. 25, 2013 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,121. |
Notice of Allowance dated Feb. 4, 2013 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/809,113. |
Notice of Allowance dated Jan. 20, 2012 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/360,467. |
Notice of Allowance dated Jan. 28, 2014 for U.S. Appl. No. 13/178,686. |
Notice of Allowance dated Mar. 30, 2015 for U.S. Appl. No. 14/097,355. |
Notice of Allowance dated May 22, 2015 for U.S. Appl. No. 14/510,212. |
Notice of Allowance dated May 3, 2013 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,126. |
Notice of Allowance dated Oct. 15, 2012 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,113. |
Notice of Allowance dated Oct. 31, 2013 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/924,628. |
Notice of Allowance for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,117 dated Nov. 18, 2015. |
Notice of Allowance for U.S. Appl. No. 13/970,944 dated Sep. 11, 2015. |
Notice of Allowance for U.S. Appl. No. 14/510,243 dated Nov. 6, 2015. |
Notice of Allowance for U.S. Appl. No. 14/604,881 dated Oct. 9, 2015. |
Notice of Allowance for U.S. Appl. No. 14/604,886 dated Sep. 25, 2015. |
O'Brien et al., "Visible Light Communications and Other Developments in Optical Wireless," Wireless World Research Forum, 2006, 26 pages. |
Office Action dated Apr. 22, 2014 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,114. |
Office Action dated Apr. 8, 2015 for U.S. Appl. No. 14/305,456. |
Office Action dated Aug. 2, 2012 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,114. |
Office Action dated Dec. 17, 2012 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,118. |
Office Action dated Dec. 4, 2013 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/803,805. |
Office Action dated Feb. 1, 2012 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/584,143. |
Office Action dated Feb. 17, 2015 for JP Application 2012-520587. |
Office Action dated Feb. 2, 2015 for CN Application 201080035731. |
Office Action dated Jan. 28, 2015 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,117. |
Office Action dated Jul. 1, 2014 for JP Application 2012-520587. |
Office Action dated Jul. 10, 2012 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,113. |
Office Action dated Jul. 11, 2012 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,121. |
Office Action dated Jun. 10, 2013 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/924,628. |
Office Action dated Jun. 23, 2014 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,117. |
Office Action dated Jun. 27, 2013 for U.S. Appl. No. 13/178,686. |
Office Action dated Mar. 11, 2014 for JP Application 2012-523605. |
Office Action dated Mar. 25, 2015 for U.S. Appl. No. 14/305,472. |
Office Action dated Mar. 6, 2015 for U.S. Appl. No. 13/733,322. |
Office Action dated May 12, 2011 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/360,467. |
Office Action dated May 27, 2015 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,117. |
Office Action dated Nov. 12, 2013 for U.S. Appl. No. 13/231,077. |
Office Action dated Nov. 4, 2013 for CN Application No. 201080032373.7. |
Office Action dated Oct. 2, 2012 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,117. |
Office Action dated Oct. 24, 2013 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,117. |
Office Action dated Oct. 9, 2012 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,126. |
Office Action dated Sep. 10, 2014 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/803,805. |
Office Action dated Sep. 24, 2014 for JP Application 2012-523605. |
Office Action for U.S. Appl. No. 13/970,964 dated Jun. 29, 2015. |
Office Action for U.S. Appl. No. 13/970,990 dated Aug. 20, 2015. |
Office Action for U.S. Appl. No. 14/510,243 dated Jul. 28, 2015. |
Office Action for U.S. Appl. No. 14/510,283 dated Jul. 29, 2015. |
Office Action for U.S. Appl. No. 14/510,283 mailed Jul. 29, 2015. |
Office Action for U.S. Appl. No. 14/573,207 dated Nov. 4, 2015. |
Office Action mailed Feb. 2, 2015 for CN Application 201080035731.X. |
Office Action mailed Oct. 24, 2013 for U.S. Appl. No. 12/806,117. |
Partial International Search Report dated Mar. 27, 2015 for PCT/US2014/068556. |
Partial International Search Report dated Nov. 16, 2012 for PCT/US2012/052774. |
Partial International Search Report for PCT/US2015/037660 dated Aug. 21, 2015. |
Partial International Search Report for PCT/US2015/045252 dated Nov. 18, 2015. |
Reissue U.S. Appl. No. 15/970,436, filed May 3, 2018. |
Reissue U.S. Appl. No. 16/033,917, filed Jul. 12, 2018. |
Reissue U.S. Appl. No. 16/205,071, filed Nov. 29, 2018. |
Reissue U.S. Appl. No. 16/282,231, filed Feb. 21, 2019. |
U.S. Appl. No. 16/819,497, filed Mar. 16, 2020. |
Zalewski et al., "Safety Issues in Avionics and Automotive Databuses," IFAC World Congress, Jul. 2005, 6 pages. |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
USRE49705E1 (en) | 2023-10-17 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US9332598B1 (en) | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices having multiple emitter modules | |
US9345097B1 (en) | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals | |
US9247605B1 (en) | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices | |
US9155155B1 (en) | Overlapping measurement sequences for interference-resistant compensation in light emitting diode devices | |
USRE49479E1 (en) | LED illumination device and calibration method for accurately characterizing the emission LEDs and photodetector(s) included within the LED illumination device | |
USRE49246E1 (en) | LED illumination device and method for accurately controlling the intensity and color point of the illumination device over time | |
US11243112B2 (en) | Emitter module for an LED illumination device | |
US11252805B2 (en) | Illumination device and method for calibrating an illumination device over changes in temperature, drive current, and time | |
US9392663B2 (en) | Illumination device and method for controlling an illumination device over changes in drive current and temperature | |
US9769899B2 (en) | Illumination device and age compensation method | |
US9736903B2 (en) | Illumination device and method for calibrating and controlling an illumination device comprising a phosphor converted LED | |
EP3162167B1 (en) | Led illumination device and method for calibrating and controlling an led illumination device over changes in temperature, drive current, and time | |
WO2016057089A1 (en) | Interference-resistant compensation in illumination devices comprising light emitting diodes | |
USRE49705E1 (en) | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices using multiple series of measurement intervals | |
USRE50018E1 (en) | Interference-resistant compensation for illumination devices having multiple emitter modules | |
WO2016032772A1 (en) | Led illumination device and methods for accurately characterizing and controlling the emission leds and photodetector(s) included within the led illumination device | |
CN113784474B (en) | Method for controlling a lighting device and lighting device |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
FEPP | Fee payment procedure |
Free format text: ENTITY STATUS SET TO UNDISCOUNTED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: BIG.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: LUTRON TECHNOLOGY COMPANY LLC, PENNSYLVANIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:LUTRON KETRA, LLC;REEL/FRAME:054940/0343 Effective date: 20201218 |
|
MAFP | Maintenance fee payment |
Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 8TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1552); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY Year of fee payment: 8 |